QC 
 
 UC-NBLF 
 
 ROE AND LABOR 
 
 UEODETIU SURVEY 
 
 O. H. TITTMANN. 
 
 DIRECTIONS 
 
 FOR 
 
 MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS 
 
 BY 
 
 DANIEL L. HAZARD 
 
 COMPUTER, DIVISION OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 
 
 WASHINGTON 
 
 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
 , 1911 
 
GIFT OF 
 
DEPARTMENT OF COMMERCE AND LABOR 
 
 M ^ COAST AND GEODETIC SURVEY 
 O. H. TITTMANN, SUPERINTENDENT 
 
 DIRECTIONS 
 
 FOR 
 
 MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS 
 
 BY 
 
 DANIEL L. HAZARD 
 
 COMPUTER, DIVISION OF TERRESTRIAL MAGNETISM 
 
 WASHINGTON 
 
 GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE 
 1911 
 
 OF THE 
 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
.- 
 
or, 
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 Page. 
 
 Preface 5 
 
 THEORY or MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 The earth's magnetism 7 
 
 Introduction 7 
 
 Magnetic elements 7 
 
 Units of measure of intensity 8 
 
 Distribution of the earth's magnetism 8 
 
 Variations of the earth's magnetism 9 
 
 Derivation of formulas 10 
 
 Determination of the true meridian by observations of the sun 10 
 
 Dip '. 12 
 
 Horizontal intensity 14 
 
 Oscillations 15 
 
 Deflections 17 
 
 Total intensity 21 
 
 Determination of the constants of a magnetometer 23 
 
 Moment of inertia 23 
 
 Temperature coefficient 26 
 
 Induction coefficient 28 
 
 Distribution coefficients 30 
 
 Deflection distances 34 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS ON LAND. 
 
 General directions 35 
 
 Equipment 39 
 
 Latitude from observations of the sun 40 
 
 Latitude from observations of Polaris 44 
 
 Determination of the true meridian and local mean time by observations of 
 
 the sun 45 
 
 Adjustment of the theodolite 45 
 
 Observations 47 
 
 Computation 50 
 
 Determination of the true meridian by observations of Polaris 52 
 
 Determination of the magnetic declination * 53 
 
 A . With a 'magnetometer 53 
 
 Coast and Geodetic Survey pattern 53 
 
 India Magnetic Survey pattern 59 
 
 Declination from horizontal intensity observations 61 
 
 B. With a compass declinometer or compass attachment of a dip circle. 62 
 Determination of the dip 66 
 
 A. With a dip circle 66 
 
 B. With an earth inductor 72 
 
 Determination of the horizontal intensity 74 
 
 Torsion observations '. 74 
 
 Oscillations 74 
 
 Deflections 75 
 
 Computation 78 
 
 Determination of the total intensity. 81 
 
 3 
 
 345597 
 
4 \/ ; lC\ ; v CONTENTS. 
 
 DlREC?} OJJS .fSpa ;Q^\AT10N& AT' SEA . 
 
 .:. . /.*. : : ?.- !'." ....................................... 87 
 
 Decimation ............. : ............................................. 88 
 
 Dip and total intensity ................................................. 97 
 
 Special directions ...................................................... 102 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATING A MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY. 
 
 Buildings .............................................................. 103 
 
 Variation instruments. . ................................................ 103 
 
 Conversion to absolute values ........................................... 106 
 
 Base-line values ................................................... 107 
 
 Scale values ...................................................... 109 
 
 Temperature coefficients ........................................... 113 
 
 Temperature ........................................................... 114 
 
 Time scale ........... .......................... ........................ 115 
 
 Reading of ordinates .................................................... 115 
 
 Programme of work .................................................... 115 
 
 General directions ...................................................... 116 
 
 TABLES. 
 
 I. Correction to the observed altitude of the sun for refraction and parallax. . 119 
 
 II. Correction in azimuth and altitude of the sun for semi-diameter ........ 120 
 
 III. Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun; values of m ........ 120 
 
 IV. Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun; values of A ........ 121 
 
 V. Correction for rate of chronometer. (Oscillations) ..................... 126 
 
 VI. Torsion factor. (Oscillations) ......................................... 126 
 
 VII. Reduction of log C from 20 C. to other temperatures. (Deflections) ____ 127 
 
 VIII. Correction for lack of balance of dip needle ........................... 127 
 
 IX. Diurnal variation of declination ...................................... 128 
 
 X. Diurnal variation of dip .............................................. 129 
 
 XI. Diurnal variation of horizontal intensity ............................... 130 
 
 XII. Multiples of the sines of the angles 22. 5, 45, and 67. 5 ................ 131 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 FIG. 1 . Fundamental spherical triangle ..................................... 11 
 
 2. Position of magnets during deflections ........ ........................ 18 
 
 3. Coast and Geodetic Survey pattern magnetometer ..................... 54 
 
 4. India Magnetic Survey pattern magnetometer ........................ 59 
 
 5. Kew pattern dip circle ............................................. 67 
 
 .6. Remagnetization of dip needle ....................................... 68 
 
 7. Wild pattern earth inductor ......................................... 72 
 
 8. Four and six oscillations ............................................ 75 
 
 9. Lloyd-Creak pattern dip circle ...................................... 98 
 
 10. Relative position of variometers ..................................... 104 
 
DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 Although the principles involved in the measurements of the earth's 
 magnetism have not changed since the publication of the third 
 edition of "Directions for Magnetic Observations with Portable 
 Instruments," * the methods of observing and the instruments 
 used have received so many modifications as the result of accumu- 
 lated experience that a new presentation of the subject has been 
 needed for some time to facilitate the field work and to secure 
 uniformity. In addition it is important that the principles involved 
 should be explained in more detail than was done in the above- 
 mentioned publication, so that the observer may have a better under- 
 standing of what he is doing and why he is doing it without being 
 obliged to refer to other publications. Moreover, with the estab- 
 lishment of five magnetic observatories and the inauguration of 
 magnetic observations on board the vessels of the Survey, the need 
 has arisen for printed directions for making the observations required 
 in those two branches of the magnetic work of the Survey. The 
 endeavor will be made to present the subject-matter in such form 
 that an observer familiar with the use of instruments of precision 
 but without experience in magnetic work may be able to make in a 
 satisfactory manner the various observations incident to the deter- 
 mination of the magnetic elements without other assistance than that 
 to be obtained from these directions. 
 
 In the preparation of this paper the following publications have 
 been consulted: 
 
 Principal Facts of the Earth's Magnetism, by L. A. Bauer. Wash- 
 ington, Government Printing Office, 1909. (Reprinted from U. S. 
 Magnetic Declination Tables, 1902.) 
 
 Theory of Magnetic Measurements, by F. E. Nipher. New York, 
 1886. 
 
 Spherical and Practical Astronomy, by Wm. Chauvenet. Phila- 
 delphia, 1887. 
 
 Traite de Magnetisme Terrestre, by E. Mascart. Paris, 1900. 
 
 Erdmagrietismus, Erdstrom und Polarlicht, by Dr. A. Nippoldt, jr. 
 Leipzig, 1903. 
 
 *Appendix No. 8, C. & G. S. Report for 1881. Gov't Printing Office, 1882. 
 
6 DIRECTIONS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Handbuch des Erdmagnetismus, by J. Lament. Berlin, 1849. 
 
 Ableitung des Ausdrucks fur die Ablenkung eines Magnetnadel 
 durch einen Magnet, by Dr. Borgen. Hamburg, 1891. 
 
 Collimator Magnets and the Determination of the Earth's Hori- 
 zontal Force, by Charles Chree. Proceedings Roy. Soc. London, 
 No. 419, 1899. 
 
 The Law of Action between Magnets, by Charles Chree. London, 
 Edinburgh, and Dublin, Phil. Magazine, August, 1904. 
 
 La Section MagnStique de Tobservatoire de 1' fibre, by E. Merveille, 
 S. J. Barcelone, 1908. 
 
 Elementary Practical Physics, by Stewart and Gee. London, 
 1887. 
 
 Elements of the Mathematical Theory of Electricity and Mag- 
 netism, by J. J. Thomson, Cambridge, England, 1897. 
 
 A Treatise on Magnetism and Electricity, by Andrew Gray. 
 London, 1898. 
 
 A Physical Treatise on Electricity and Magnetism, by J. E. H. 
 Gordon. New York, 1880. 
 
 Practical Problems and the Compensation of the Compass, by 
 Diehl and Southerland. Washington, Government Printing Office, 
 1898. 
 
 Admiralty Manual for the Deviation of the Compass, by Evans 
 and Smith. London, 1901. 
 
 The subject will be treated under the following general headings: 
 
 I. Theory of magnetic measurements, including some of the more 
 important facts about the earth's magnetism and the methods 
 employed for determining instrumental constants. 
 
 II. Directions for absolute observations on land. 
 
 III. Directions for observations at sea. 
 
 IV. Directions for operating a magnetic observatory. 
 
THEORY OF MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 THE EARTH'S MAGNETISM. 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 Whether the earth is a great magnet or simply acts as a magnet 
 as the result of electric currents flowing about it, it is surrounded by 
 a magnetic field, and the measurements of the earth's magnetism at 
 any place consist in determining the direction and intensity of that 
 field. 
 
 A magnet suspended in such a way as to be free to turn about its 
 center of gravity would take a position with its magnetic axis tangent 
 to the lines of force of the earth's magnetic field. As it is practically 
 impossible to suspend a magnet in that way, it is usual to determine 
 the direction of the earth's magnetic field by means of two magnets, 
 one constrained to rotate in a horizontal plane and the other in a 
 vertical plane. 
 
 MAGNETIC ELEMENTS. 
 
 The magnetic meridian at any place is the vertical plane defined 
 by the direction of the lines of force at that place. 
 
 The magnetic declination, D t is the angle between the astronomic 
 meridian and the magnetic meridian and is considered East or West 
 according as the magnetic meridian is east or west of true North. 
 Declination is often called variation of the compass or simply variation. 
 
 The dip or inclination, I, is the angle which the lines of force make 
 with the horizontal plane. 
 
 Instead of measuring the total intensity, F, of the earth's magnetic 
 field, it is usually more convenient to measure its horizontal com- 
 ponent, H. These three quantities, declination, dip, and horizontal 
 intensity, are usually spoken of as the magnetic elements and from 
 them the total intensity and its components in the three coordinate 
 planes may be computed by means of the simple formulas: 
 
 F=H sec I Y = H sin D 
 
 X = H cos D Z = H tan 7 
 
 X and Y being the components in the horizontal plane, X directed 
 north ( + ) or south ( ) and Y directed east ( + ) or west ( ), and 
 Z being the component directed vertical!}' downward. 
 
8 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 UNITS OF MEASURE OF INTENSITY. 
 
 The intensity of a magnetic field is the force which a unit pole 
 would experience when placed in it. A unit pole is one which repels 
 an equal pole at unit distance with unit force. 
 
 At the present time almost all measurements of the intensity of 
 the earth's magnetic field are made in terms of the C. G. S. system, 
 in which the fundamental units are the centimeter, the gram, and the 
 second. Before the metric system came into general use, it was 
 customary in English-speaking countries to use the British system of 
 units, based on the foot, the grain, and the second. To convert 
 measures of intensity expressed in British units into their equivalents 
 in the C. G. S. system, they must be multiplied by the factor 0.046108 
 (logarithm = 8.66378). 
 
 DISTRIBUTION OF THE EARTH 's MAGNETISM. 
 
 The magnetic poles of the earth are those points on its surface at 
 which the dip needle stands vertical and toward which the compass 
 needle points, throughout the adjacent region. The north magnetic 
 pole is approximately in latitude 70 N. and longitude 97 W., 
 and the south magnetic pole in latitude 73 S. and longitude 156 E. 
 It must be borne in mind that these magnetic poles have not the 
 characteristics of the poles of a bar magnet. If they had, there 
 should be an enormous increase in the total intensity when approach- 
 ing the poles, which is not the case. They are not even the points 
 of maximum intensity, there being four areas, two in each hemis- 
 phere, in which the total intensity is greater. The earth acts like a 
 great spherical magnet; that is, a bar magnet at its center which 
 would produce the effects observed at the surface would have its 
 poles practically coincident. 
 
 If the earth were uniformly magnetized, its magnetic poles would 
 be at the opposite extremities of a diameter, the magnetic meridians 
 would be arcs of great circles, and a comparatively small number of 
 observations would suffice to determine the distribution of mag- 
 netism over its surface. As a matter of fact, according to Bauer, 
 only about two-thirds of the earth's magnetism can be represented 
 by a uniform magnetization and the distribution of the remainder is 
 very irregular, representing the resultant effect of irregularities which 
 are continental, regional, or purely local in extent. These local 
 irregularities or " local disturbances" are sometimes of sufficient 
 intensity to produce local magnetic poles, such as have been found by 
 observation near Juneau, Alaska, and between Kursk and Odessa, 
 in Russia. 
 
 It is usual to represent the distribution of the earth's magnetism 
 graphically by means of isogonic, isoclinic, and iso-dynamic charts, 
 
THE EARTH'S MAGNETISM. 9 
 
 on which are shown lines of equal declination, equal inclination, or 
 equal intensity. For the construction of such charts many observa- 
 tions are required in order that the irregular distribution may be 
 represented properly, "and it is the usual experience that the addition 
 of new observations brings out new irregularities. Inasmuch as the 
 earth's magnetism is undergoing constant change, its distribution is 
 different for different epochs, and a knowledge of the amount of 
 change from one year to another is necessary before the results of 
 observations made at different times can be reduced to the year for 
 which it is desired to construct an iso-magnetic chart. 
 
 VARIATIONS OF THE EARTH'S MAGNETISM. 
 
 The continual change to which the earth's magnetism is subject 
 has been analyzed in various ways and shown to be the resultant 
 effect of several more or less systematic variations combined with 
 irregular disturbances, which from time to time attain considerable 
 magnitude^ constituting what are known as magnetic storms. These 
 " storms" occur at irregular intervals and may last only a few hours 
 or several days and sometimes attain an intensity sufficient to pro- 
 duce a range of 1 or 2 in declination and of 2 or 3 per cent in the 
 horizontal intensity. They usually occur almost simultaneously over 
 the entire surface of the globe, and often accompany auroral displays 
 and the appearance of large spots on the sun. The occurrence of a 
 storm during observations can usually be detected by the erratic 
 behavior of the magnet or needle, and calls for a repetition of the 
 observations after the storm has subsided. 
 
 Of the systematic variations the largest and most important is the 
 secular variation, so called because it requires centuries for its full 
 development. While magnetic observations do not as yet cover a 
 sufficiently long term of years to warrant a definite conclusion, yet 
 the evidence is strong that at least for the direction of the earth's 
 field the secular variation is of a periodic character, i. e., that the 
 change with lapse of time does not go on indefinitely in one direction. 
 Eventually a turning point is reached. In the case of the declina- 
 tion, numerous series of observations are available which are of 
 sufficient extent to include one and in some cases probably two such 
 turning points. Tables showing the secular change of the magnetic 
 elements in the United States will be found on pages 114-119 of 
 "United States Magnetic Tables and Magnetic Charts for 1905." 
 
 Of the periodic variations having for periods a year, a solar day 
 and a lunar day, the only one of sufficient magnitude to be of prac- 
 tical importance is the solar-diurnal variation, or as it is usually 
 designated, diurnal variation. Tables IX, X, and XI show the 
 diurnal variation of declination, dip, and horizontal intensity at four 
 of the magnetic observatories of the Coast and Geodetic Survey, 
 based upon several years' observations. They were condensed from 
 
10 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 tables giving the average diurnal variation for 10 selected days for 
 each month of the years specified. 
 
 The diurnal variation appears to be closely associated with the 
 position of the sun above the horizon. During* the night hours there 
 is normally little change in any of the three elements. The daily 
 range is greater in years of maximum sun spot frequency than in 
 years of minimum, and varies somewhat with the season. 
 
 From an inspection of Table IX it will be seen that for all of the 
 observatories the diurnal variation of declination shows the same 
 general characteristics; a well-marked maximum (easterly extreme) 
 between 8 and 10 in the morning, and a well-marked minimum (west- 
 erly extreme) between 1 and 3 in the afternoon. 
 
 For dip and horizontal intensity, on the other hand, there is only 
 one well-marked extreme, except in the case of the summer months 
 at Cheltenham, and even there one extreme is much more pronounced 
 than the other. In all cases this extreme occurs not far from noon, 
 but at Sitka and Cheltenham it is a maximum for dip and a minimum 
 for horizontal intensity, while for Honolulu and Porto Rico it is a 
 minimum for dip and a maximum for horizontal intensity. 
 
 DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN BY OBSERVATIONS OF THE 
 
 SUN. 
 
 As the magnetic declination is the angle between the true meridian 
 and the magnetic meridian, its measurement requires the determina- 
 tion of the direction of both of these planes. The direction of the 
 magnetic meridian is obtained by means of a magnet free to rotate 
 in a horizontal plane about a vertical axis. The direction of the true 
 meridian may be determined by observations either of the sun or of 
 a star, especially Polaris. In connection with magnetic work it is 
 usually more convenient to make the observations in the daytime 
 and the method in general use consists of a series of observations of 
 the sun both morning and afternoon, each observation comprising a 
 measure of the altitude of the sun and the angle between it and a 
 reference (azimuth) mark, and a record of the time. The computa- 
 tion of the azimuth of the sun and the local mean time from observa- 
 tions of this character involves the solution of the spherical triangle 
 defined by the pole, the zenith, and the sun, the three sides being 
 known. The fundamental formulas of spherical trigonometry have 
 been transformed to fit this special case as follows : 
 
 When the sides of a spherical triangle are known the angles may be 
 computed by formulas of the form: 
 
 sin s 1 sin (s l a) 
 in which 2s l = a + b + c. 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 
 
 11 
 
 In Figure 1 let Z P S represent the triangle defined by the zenith, 
 the pole, and the sun. 
 
 SP = a = 90- = 2? given in 
 the Ephemeris of the sun. 
 
 SZ = 6 = 90 - h determined 
 by observation. 
 
 PZ = c = 90 - < determined 
 by observation. 
 
 The angle SZP = A n is the angle 
 between the true meridian and the 
 vertical plane through the sun and 
 is therefore the azimuth of the sun 
 counted from the North. The 
 angle SPZ = B is the hour angle of 
 the sun, t. Substituting the values 
 
 . ; . - . 
 
 or a, o, and c in the tormina and 
 
 letting 2s = p-\-Ji + (j) ) the following transformations may be made : 
 
 -7i- < = 180 
 
 FIG. 1. Fundamental spherical triangle. 
 
 COS S COS (Sp) 
 
 As it is usual to reckon azimuths from the south, substitute 
 
 180 -A, = A n 
 and the equation may be written in the form: 
 
 ctn 2 -Jk4 8 = sec s sec (s p) sin (s(f>) sin (s Ji) 
 A similar transformation of the equation for the angle B = t gives 
 
 tan 2 4- 2 = cos s sin (s h) esc (s (j)) sec (s p) 
 and by combination with the equation for ctn 2 JJL s : 
 
 tan 2 i* = F1 
 and 
 
 tan 4- 1 = 
 
 sin (s Ji) sec (s p) 
 ctn iA, 
 
 a very convenient form when the azimuth and hour angle are to be 
 computed from the same set of observations. 
 
12 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 The computed angle between the sun and the true south meridian 
 combined with the measured angle between the sun and a selected 
 terrestrial object (azimuth mark) gives the angle between the true 
 south meridian and the mark, or the true azimuth of the mark. 
 
 The computed hour angle of the sun combined with the equation of 
 time gives the local mean time of observation, and this compared 
 with the chronometer time of observation gives the chronometer 
 correction on local mean time. If the chronometer correction on 
 standard time has been determined by means of telegraphic time 
 signals, an approximate value of the longitude of the place can 
 readily be computed. 
 
 DIP. 
 
 The dip is usually measured by means of a dip circle in which a 
 magnetized needle is supported so as to be free to rotate in a vertical 
 plane. A steel axle through the center of gravity of the needle ter- 
 minates in finely ground pivots which rest on agate knife edges. The 
 angle of dip is measured on a graduated circle concentric with the 
 axle of the needle. In order to measure the angle of dip directly, the 
 needle must swing in the magnetic meridian. The observed angle 
 of inclination in any other plane will be too large, as will be seen from 
 the following considerations. In the magnetic meridian the hori- 
 zontal and vertical components of the total intensity are H and Z, 
 and Z = 77 tan 7. In a plane making an angle a with the magnetic 
 meridian, the components are H cos a and Z, and Z = H cos a tan I a . 
 Hence tan 7= cos a tan 7 a . As the cosine of an angle is always los 
 than unity, 7 a is always greater than 7. This formula may be used to 
 compute the true dip from observations out of the meridian, provided 
 the angle a is known. The equation may be written in the form 
 ctn7 a = ctn7 cos^. Let <r = 90; then ctn7 a = and 7 a = 90. That 
 is, when the instrument is in the magnetic prime vertical the dip 
 needle stands vertical, a fact w r hich furnishes a simple method for 
 setting the instrument in the magnetic meridian when a compass 
 attachment is not available for the purpose. Extreme accuracy in 
 the determination of the magnetic meridian is not required, as will 
 be seen if a be computed from the above formula assuming 7=45 
 and I a = 45 OOM, the resulting value of a being 37'. That is, unless 
 the instrument is more than 30 ' out of the magnetic meridian, the 
 effect on the dip is not as much as O'.l. 
 
 The true dip may be obtained by combining observations in two 
 planes at right angles to each other. 
 
 For Ctn T a = ctn 7 cos a 
 
 and ctn 7(9o- a ) = ctn 7 cos (90 a) = ctn 7 sin a 
 
 Hence ctn 2 7 a + ctn 2 7 ( 9o_ a ) = ctn 2 7 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 13 
 
 The ideal dip-needle would be perfectly symmetrical in size and 
 mass with respect to the axis of its pivots, but this condition can not 
 be exactly attained by the maker, and subsequent use of the needle 
 is liable to increase the divergence from this ideal condition. Most 
 of the errors due to lack of symmetry and adjustment are eliminated 
 by reversal of instrument and needle and reversal of the polarity of 
 the needle. Yet it will usually be found that different values of dip 
 are obtained before and after reversing polarity, indicating that the 
 needle would not exactly balance if demagnetized. This lack of bal- 
 ance may be ascribed without material error * to a small weight p 
 in the longitudinal axis of the needle at a distance d from the axis of 
 the pivots. The equations of equilibrium before and after reversal 
 of polarities will be: 
 
 pd cos I n = FM sin (/ I n ) 
 and pd cos I s = FM sin (/, - /) 
 
 assuming that the magnetic "moment M of the needle is the same 
 before and after reversal. 
 
 Hence cos 7 TO _ sin (/ /)_ sin I cos I n cos / sin I n 
 
 cos I s sin(7 s I) sin I s cos 7 cos I s sin I 
 
 Clearing of fractions and dividing by cos I s cos I n cos 7, 
 tan Ig tan 1= tan / tan I n 
 tan 1= to*J*^d* 
 
 That is, where the observations give different values of dip before 
 and after reversal of polarities, the mean of the two quantities does 
 not give the true dip. Instead, the angle must be found whose 
 tangent is the mean of the tangents of the observed angles. To 
 avoid the necessity of making this computation for each observation, 
 Table VIII has been prepared, giving the correction required by the 
 dip obtained by using the formula 
 
 T 4 + A 
 2 
 
 For example, if the observed dip was 72 15'.0 before reversal 
 of polarities and 72 45 '.0 afterwards, the true dip would be 
 7230 / .0 + 0'.2 = 72 3Q'.2. 
 
 At a magnetic observatory an earth inductor is usually provided for 
 determining the dip. With this instrument more accurate results 
 may be obtained in less time than with a dip circle. The operation 
 of the earth inductor is based on the principle that when a closed 
 circuit is revolved in a magnetic field, electric currents are induced 
 unless the axis of rotation is tangent to the lines of force of the field. 
 
 * The needle is so long compared with its width that the lack of symmetry with respect to the longitudinal 
 axis is not apt to be appreciable. 
 
14 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 After the instrument has been leveled and placed with the axis of 
 rotation in the magnetic meridian, the coil is rotated and its inclina- 
 tion is changed until the induced current becomes zero as shown by 
 a galvanometer placed in the circuit. The angle of inclination of the 
 coil, or dip, is then read off on the vertical circle. 
 
 Numerous comparisons of dip circles with each other and with earth 
 inductors have established the fact that, in spite of every refinement 
 of adjustment and care in observing, different dip circles give differ- 
 ent results and nearly all require corrections to reduce to the more 
 accurate earth inductor results. This is probably due in many cases 
 to irregularity of pivots of the needles and sometimes to slight 
 impurities in the metal entering into the make-up of the instrument. 
 While the effect of either of these causes would be different for differ- 
 ent angles of dip, it is the practice in the Coast and Geodetic Survey 
 to assume a uniform correction for the limited range of dip involved 
 in a season's work. 
 
 In the case of two dip circles which were used over a wide range of 
 dip and showed large and variable corrections, analytical expressions 
 of the form 
 
 sin I , cos / 
 
 -p-+* 
 
 were derived, from which to compute the required corrections, based 
 on the assumption that the varying corrections were to be ascribed 
 to the effect of the metal composing the instrument. 
 
 HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Up to the time of Gauss all measures of horizontal intensity were 
 relative, and consisted in comparing the times of oscillation at differ- 
 ent places of a magnet rotating in the horizontal plane about a ver- 
 tical axis. Assuming the magnetic moment of the magnet to be con- 
 stant, the horizontal intensity is inversely proportional to the square 
 of the time of oscillation. As a matter of fact, all magnets tend to 
 lose their magnetism gradually, but this decrease of magnetic moment 
 was determined and allowed for approximately by observing at a 
 base station both at the beginning and end of a voyage or a season's 
 work. 
 
 Gauss conceived the idea of combining with the oscillations a set of 
 observations in which the intensity magnet is used to deflect an 
 auxiliary magnet, and thus determine the horizontal intensity abso- 
 lutely, and this is the method in general use at the present day. Two 
 distinct operations are involved: Oscillations, which serve to deter- 
 mine the product of the magnetic moment of the magnet and the 
 horizontal intensity; deflections, from which the ratio of the same 
 two quantities is obtained. 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 15 
 
 OSCILLATIONS. 
 
 If a magnet be free to rotate about a vertical axis through its center 
 of gravity, it will come to rest with its magnetic axis in the magnetic 
 meridian. If it be turned out of that plane and then released it will 
 oscillate as a horizontal pendulum under the influence of the earth's 
 magnetism, the amplitude of its swing gradually diminishing until it 
 finally comes to rest again in the magnetic meridian. If T be the 
 time of one oscillation; i. e., the time between two successive transits 
 (in opposite directions) across the meridian, K the combined moment 
 of inertia of the magnet and stirrup about the axis of rotation, and 
 M the magnetic moment of the magnet, the equation of motion for a 
 pendulum becomes: 
 
 0.00000 
 02 
 
 3 04 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 12 
 
 subject, however, to certain corrections as explained below. 
 
 Reduction to infinitesimal arc. The above formula is based on the 
 assumption that the arc of vibration is infinitesimal. For a finite 
 arc the observed time of one oscillation must be diminished by a 
 
 small amount, the corrective factor being (1 ^- V in which 
 
 a' and a," are the initial and terminal arcs of vibration, expressed in 
 
 (a 2 \ 
 1 ^j \ a being the average arc of vibration. 
 
 From the adjoining table it will be seen that for an 
 average arc of 3 this correction amounts to only 1 
 part in 25000, and as the arc of vibration need never 
 exceed this amount, and in the majority of magnet- 
 ometers is still more restricted by the limits of the 
 scale of the magnet, this correction is in general 
 negligible. 
 
 Correction for rate of chronometer. The observed time of one oscil- 
 lation must be corrected for the rate of the chronometer used. If r 
 be the daily rate of the chronometer in seconds, plus when losing and 
 minus when gaining, the observed value of T must be multiplied by 
 
 the factor ( 1 + r ") or T must be increased by 0.00001 16 Tr. 
 \ 8o400/ 
 
 Values of this expression for different values of T and r are given in 
 Table V. 
 
 Correction for torsion. The earth's magnetism is not the only force 
 acting to cause the oscillations. It is usual to suspend the magnet 
 by one or more silk fibers or by a very fine wire or metallic ribbon, 
 the torsion of which must be taken into account. The ratio between 
 the force of torsion and the horizontal intensity may be determined 
 in the following manner : When the magnet is at rest in the magnetic 
 
16 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 meridian, if the upper end of the suspension fiber be turned through 
 any angle, say 90, the magnet will be turned out of the meridian 
 through a small angle h (expressed in minutes) on account of the tor- 
 sion of the fiber. The equation of equilibrium between the two 
 forces for a twist of 90 is: 
 
 C (5400 -h)=MHsmh or C= ^^ y 
 
 in which C is the force of torsion per minute of arc. Experiments 
 have shown that the force of torsion is approximately proportional to 
 the amount of twist. In the case in point the upper end of the fiber 
 is turned through 5400', but the lower end is turned in the same 
 direction through the angle h, so that the amount of twist is (5400 Ji). 
 When during oscillations the magnet makes any angle, as 6, with 
 the meridian the force exerted by the earth's magnetism to pull it 
 back into the meridian is M H sin 0, and the force of torsion acting 
 
 ,. ,. . OM H sin h , ,. 
 
 in the same direction is , , and the resultant of the two: 
 
 , , . . dMHsmh ,, . .fi 6 sin h ~] 
 
 MHsm 6+ 5400-ft = MH 8m l 1+ sin 6 (5400 -fc)j 
 
 since both h and 6 are small. Hence, in the oscillation formula, 
 
 540 
 
 must be substituted for M H in order to take into account the effect 
 of torsion. Values of the logarithm of [5400 -r- (5400 - h)] for different 
 values of h are given in Table VI, but for small values such as are 
 usually experienced in magnetometers the logarithm of this factor 
 may be assumed proportional to h, i. e. : 
 
 log 5400 -log (5400 -h)=7i [log 5400 -log (5400- l)] = /t [0.00008]. 
 Induction. When a magnet is placed hi a magnetic field its mag- 
 netism is temporarily increased by induction by an amount propor- 
 tional to the strength of that component of the field which is parallel 
 to the axis of the magnet. In the case of the oscillating magnet, its 
 
 / 77\ 
 
 magnetic moment is increased from M to (M+/i H) or M(\+ p. 1, 
 
 /JL being the induction factor. 
 
 Temperature correction. As the magnetic moment of a magnet 
 changes with change of temperature, increasing as the temperature 
 decreases and vice versa, and as in general the temperature of the 
 magnet is different for the two sets of observations, deflections and 
 oscillations, it is necessary to allow for this difference in temperature 
 before combining the two equations to compute H and M. If M 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 17 
 
 and M' be the magnetic moments at temperatures t and t' respec- 
 tively, then the temperature coefficient, q, is represented by the 
 formula 
 
 M f - M 2 
 
 - t _ t > 
 
 As (M' M) is usually very small as compared with M and M r it 
 will not introduce a material error to substitute either M or M' for 
 
 . The change in M with change in temperature may then 
 
 A 
 
 be computed by the formula 
 
 M'=M[l+ (t-t'}q\ 
 
 If t' be the temperature of the magnet during oscillations and t the 
 temperature during deflections, then the formula gives the magnetic 
 moment at the temperature of the oscillations expressed in terms of 
 the moment at the temperature of deflections. 
 
 The corrections for rate of chronometer and reduction to infini- 
 tesimal arc may be readily applied to the observed value of T. It 
 is more convenient to correct for torsion, induction, and change of 
 temperature by the addition of three factors to the oscillation formula 
 so that it becomes : 
 
 5400 
 
 or 
 
 DEFLECTIONS. 
 
 A magnet free to turn about a vertical axis will come to rest with 
 its magnetic axis in the magnetic meridian if acted on by the earth's 
 magnetism alone. If a second magnet be brought near to the sus- 
 pended magnet, the latter will be deflected out of the magnetic 
 meridian by an amount depending upon the relative strength of the 
 two forces acting upon it. The law of the action between two mag- 
 nets under these conditions was developed by Gauss for the special 
 cases where the two magnets lie in the same horizontal plane, (1) with 
 the axis of the deflecting magnet in the magnetic prime vertical 
 through the center of the suspended magnet and (2) with the center 
 of the deflecting magnet in the magnetic meridian through the center 
 of the suspended magnet and with its axis in the magnetic prime 
 vertical. Lament later extended the discussion to the cases where 
 the axes of the deflecting and suspended magnets are at right angles 
 to each other, (1) the deflector being to the east or west and (2) the 
 deflector being to the north or south. In 1890 Borgen developed 
 the formula for the most general case, placing no restrictions upon 
 7721311- 2 
 
18 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 the relative positions of the two magnets, and derived therefrom the 
 forms applicable to the special cases already treated by Gauss and 
 Lamont. Nearly all magnetometers of recent make are arranged 
 with deflection bars attached at right angles to the telescope by which 
 pointings are made on the suspended magnet, and hence the deflec- 
 tions are made in Lament's first posi- 
 tion. It will be sufficient for our 
 purposes, therefore, to outline the 
 method of deriving the deflection 
 formula for that special case. Sup- 
 pose that the suspended magnet 
 Nj S t is deflected out of the magnetic 
 meridian through the angle u by the 
 magnet N S, placed so that the pro- 
 longation of its magnetic axis passes 
 through the center pf N t S r Let m 
 ^ and m 1 and 2 Z and 2 l l be the pole 
 strength and distance between poles 
 of the two magnets and r the distance 
 between their centers. Then the 
 ^ magnets during deflec- magnetic mome nts are H=2ml and 
 
 M l = 2m l l l . For an approximate so- 
 lution of the problem, assume that Z x is so small compared with 
 r that the distances from the pole N to .Nj and S t may be taken as 
 (r + Z) and from S to N t and S t as (r l). Then the force of attrac- 
 
 , i , XT . 771 771. . , . 771 771. Z, 
 
 tion between S and Nj is - ( jL and the turning moment is -, I,* 
 
 (T I) (T I) 
 
 771 771 
 
 The force of repulsion between N and Nj is , jL and the correspond- 
 
 T 
 
 ing turning moment is , _i_ yy- The total turning moment resulting 
 the action between the two magnets is therefore: 
 
 2 m TTij \ 2m m^ Z t _ 8 m m l ll 1 r _ 2 MM^ r 
 
 -IY~~ (r 2 -/ 3 ) 2 = (r^-Z 2 ) 2 
 3 Z 4 4 Z 6 
 
 The rigorous solution, taking into account the pole distance of N 1 S 1 
 yields an expression of the same form, namely : - |- 
 
 in which P, Q, and succeeding coefficients are functions of the dimen- 
 sions of the two magnets and the distribution of their magnetism. 
 The series converges so rapidly that the coefficients beyond Q need 
 not be considered for properly chosen deflection distances. 
 
 The turning moment of the force tending to pull the suspended 
 magnet back into the meridian is HM 1 smu, u being the angle of 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 19 
 
 deflection. When the magnet is at rest the two opposing forces are 
 equal and opposite, 
 
 P and Q are called the first and second distribution coefficients, 
 and their values could be computed from the dimensions of the mag- 
 nets by means of Borgen's formula, provided the ratio of distance 
 between poles to length of magnet was known. This ratio is difficult 
 to determine with accuracy and appears to be different for different 
 magnets, so that only approximate results can be obtained by this 
 method. Borgen concludes that on the average the pole distance is 
 a little more than 0.8 the length of the magnet and, assuming that it 
 is the same for both deflecting and suspended magnets, deduces the 
 formulas: 
 
 P = 2Z 2 -3Z 1 2 
 
 It is better, in view of the uncertainty of the above ratio, to depend 
 on observations for the determination of P and Q. It is evident that 
 if deflection observations are made at three distances there will 
 
 TJ 
 result three equations from which the three unknowns ^., P, and Q 
 
 can be computed, as explained later. 
 
 The above equations for P and Q are useful, however, to determine 
 approximately the relative length of the two magnets which will 
 make P or Q zero. 
 
 When P = 2Z 2 = 3Z t 2 and Z = 1.225^. 
 
 When Q = aft-lSP^+-O and Z = 2.15Z r 
 
 o 
 
 In deriving the deflection formula given above no account has been 
 taken of the effect of induction upon the magnetic moment M of the 
 deflecting magnet. It will readily be seen that the south end of the 
 deflecting magnet will always be inclined to the north of the mag- 
 netic prime vertical whether it is placed to the east or west of the 
 suspended magnet or with its north end east or west, and the effect 
 of induction will therefore always correspond to a decrease in its 
 magnetic moment. As already stated, the induction is proportional 
 to the strength of that component of the earth's field which is par- 
 allel to the axis of the magnet, in this case H sin u. Hence the 
 moment of the deflecting magnet when the suspended magnet is de- 
 flected through the angle u is really (Mp H sin it) instead of M, 
 fji being the induction factor of the magnet. As ^ H sin u is always 
 
20 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 very small in comparison with M, we may substitute for H sin u 
 its approximate value 3- 
 
 and (M-f, H sin u) = M- 
 
 Making this correction to the deflection formula, it becomes: 
 H 2 
 
 H 
 or H- 
 
 It is probable that the distribution of the magnetism of a magnet 
 changes somewhat in the course of time, and consequently P, Q, and 
 fi. are subject to change, but results show that for a season's work, or 
 even longer, they may be considered constant without materially 
 increasing the uncertainty of the results, especially when the magnets 
 have become so well seasoned that the loss of magnetism is very slow. 
 The deflection formula may then be written: 
 
 H^ C 
 M sin u 
 
 in which = 4j 1 T^)(l+75 + ^) and is constant for a particular 
 
 deflection distance and a particular temperature. Its variation with 
 temperature may be readily computed from the coefficient of expan- 
 sion of the material, usually brass, of which the deflection bars are 
 made, since r is the only quantity in the second member which varies 
 with temperature. 
 
 The oscillations give the product of H and M 
 
 and the deflections give their ratio: 
 
 H_ 2 A2A/ P 
 M~r* sin u\ L iVV f* 
 
 from which the values of H and M can be readily computed, if we 
 assume that the values are the same for the two sets of observations. 
 So far as M is concerned this is a safe assumption, provided allowance 
 is made for the change in temperature between the two classes of 
 observations, as has been done in the formula for H M. Experience 
 shows that a magnet loses its magnetism quite rapidly for a short time 
 after magnetization, but soon settles down to a condition of very slow 
 change, inappreciable for the period covered by a set of intensity 
 observations. Exception should be made of the sudden loss of mag- 
 
DERIVATION OF FORMULAS. 21 
 
 netism resulting from a shock such as would be caused by dropping 
 the magnet or from bringing it into contact with another magnet. 
 
 In the case of H there is constant change, usually small in extent 
 during the time covered by a set of observations, but at times exceed- 
 ing in amount the error of observation. To minimize the effect of 
 this variation, the observations are usually arranged in the order: 
 Oscillations, deflections, deflections, oscillations. The following con- 
 siderations show that small changes in H such as are exceeded only at 
 times of severe magnetic storms have no appreciable effect on the 
 result. For suppose H and H d are the values of H at the time of 
 oscillations and deflections, respectively, and let H d =H + 4H. 
 The combination of the observations on the assumption that H = H d 
 would give the value H=^H H d =^/H 2 +H AH. The quantity 
 
 under the radical differs from (H + ^JHj by - , a quantity so 
 small as to be negligible except in the case of a severe magnetic 
 storm. But H + H = -. Hence it is evident that the 
 
 assumption of no change in H between the deflection and oscillation 
 observations gives a value of H which is the mean for the period cov- 
 ered by the observations. To show the effe'ct in an extreme case, 
 suppose 4H = Q.Q5H, a range seldom reached in the course of a 
 magnetic storm, then 
 
 2 H. 
 
 H d +H 
 2 
 
 Under such conditions the magnet would be so disturbed as to render 
 accurate observations impossible. 
 
 TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Under certain conditions it is inconvenient or impossible to use the 
 above method for determining the horizontal intensity. As the 
 magnetic pole is approached the horizontal intensity becomes so 
 small that the method fails for lack of accuracy. On shipboard the 
 motion of the vessel precludes the use of a fiber suspension, which is 
 essential to accurate oscillation observations. At times it is neces- 
 sary to reduce the instrumental equipment of a party as much as 
 possible. In such cases use may be made of the method devised by 
 Dr. E. Lloyd to determine the total intensity by means of a dip circle. 
 While inferior in accuracy under ordinary conditions to the method of 
 determining the horizontal intensity with a magnetometer, yet with 
 a good dip circle carefully handled it will usually yield very satisfac- 
 tory results. (See App. 3, C. & G. S. Report for 1905, p. 114.) 
 
 The method involves two operations, during both of which the dip 
 circle is so placed that the suspended needle swings in the magnetic 
 
22 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 meridian: First, the measure of the angle of inclination with a needle 
 having a weight in the south end (in north magnetic latitudes) ; sec- 
 ond, the measure of the angle through which a second needle is 
 deflected by the loaded needle, when the latter is placed at right 
 angles to it in the place provided for the purpose between the reading 
 microscopes, with the axes of rotation of the two needles lying in the 
 same straight line. In the first case the earth's magnetism acting on 
 the loaded (intensity) needle is opposed to the force of gravity acting 
 on the weight. In the second case the force exerted by the intensity 
 needle on the suspended needle is opposed to the earth's magnetism. 
 Let 7' = the dip with loaded needle, considered positive when the 
 south end is above the horizon. Then the angle through which the 
 needle is turned by the weight is u f = 1 1' 
 u = Deflection angle. 
 
 M= Magnetic moment of the intensity needle. 
 M 1 = Magnetic moment of the second needle. 
 fc = Mass of the weight. 
 
 R = Distance of weight from the axis of rotation. 
 The equation of equilibrium for the dip with loaded needle is: 
 
 TcR cos /' = F M sin u' 
 For the deflection observations, the equation is: 
 
 in which Jc t is a factor depending upon the distance between the needles 
 and the distribution of their magnetism. Combining the two equations : 
 
 Wc l RMM l cos /' = F 2 MM l sin u sin u' 
 Let Iclc.R^C 2 
 
 s 
 
 Then C 2 cos /' = F 2 sin u sin u' 
 
 F= (7Vcos /' esc u esc u' 
 G= F^/sec 1' sin u sin u' '. 
 
 When the above observations are made at a place where the dip 
 and horizontal intensity (and hence also the total intensity) are 
 known, the value of C can be computed. Knowing C the value of 
 F at any other place can be determined by observation. As the 
 factor C involves the mass of the weight and its distance from the 
 axis of rotation and also the distribution of magnetism in the needles, 
 it is necessary to guard against change, in the interval between the 
 standardization observations and those at other places. The weight 
 should be left in position and care should be taken not to change the 
 magnetic condition of the needles. Hence they must not be remag- 
 netized in the course of a season's work. / 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 23 
 DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 
 
 The two formulas used in the determinatidn of H and M from 
 observations of oscillations and deflections involve a number of factors 
 which must be determined by special observations or otherwise before 
 they can be used, namely, moment of inertia, temperature coefficient, 
 induction coefficient, and distribution coefficients, as well as the 
 deflection distances. 
 
 MOMENT OF INERTIA. i 
 
 The magnets of most magnetometers are of the collimator type, a 
 hollow steel cylinder closed at one end by a glass on which a scale is 
 etched and at the other by a lens. There is thus introduced a lack 
 of homogeneity which makes it impracticable to compute J, 7 the 
 moment of inertia of the magnet, from the dimensions of its com- 
 ponent parts. Moreover the magnet is usually supported by means 
 of a stirrup of more or less complex form, and it is the moment of the 
 magnet and stirrup combined which is involved in the formula. It 
 is usual, therefore, to determine the moment of inertia by means of 
 an auxiliary weight of nonmagnetic material and of regular form of 
 which the moment of inertia can be readily computed from its dimen- 
 sions and mass. A truly turned bronze ring or a circular cylinder of 
 about the same mass as the magnet are the forms commonly 
 employed. For a ring the moment of inertia is given by the formula: 
 
 in which d and d are the' inner and outer diameters and W is the mass. 
 For a cylinder the formula is : 
 
 #i=~(4Z 2 + 3<2 2 ) 
 
 in which Z is the length and d the diameter. To find the value of K^ 
 for any other temperature than the one at which the dimensions were 
 measured, the average coefficient of expansion of bronze, 0.000018 
 for 1 C., may be used, unless a special determination has been made 
 for the weight in question. It will be seen that 2 log (1.000018) = 
 0.000016 is the corresponding change in log K v for 1 change in the 
 temperature of the inertia weight. 
 
 If in addition to oscillations with the magnet alone, observations 
 are made with the weight added, two equations will result: 
 
 Hence K K+ 
 
 5400 
 
24 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 supposing H to remain constant and allowing for change of M with 
 change of temperature, t' being the temperature of the magnet dur- 
 ing oscillations without the weight and t the temperature during 
 oscillations with the weight. 
 
 Let ^rgx and 
 
 Then E _KK, _ (T?K { 
 
 That is, this simple formula may be used if the observed values of T 2 
 and Jj 2 are corrected for torsion and the former is reduced to the 
 temperature of the, latter. The following arrangement of the obser- 
 vations will practically eliminate small changes in H: 
 
 Begin with a set of oscillations without the inertia weight, deter- 
 mining the torsion factor with a torsion weight of the same mass as 
 the magnet. Then make a set of oscillations with the inertia weight 
 added, determining the torsion factor again, but with a torsion weight 
 of the same mass as the magnet and inertia weight combined. Con- 
 tinue making sets of oscillations alternately with and without the 
 weight, ending the series with a set without the weight. Determine 
 the torsion factor again with the last set of each class of oscillations. 
 Each set of oscillations will consist of 8 independent determinations 
 of the time of a selected number of oscillations. The first set of 
 oscillations without the weight and the first half of the second set, 
 combined with the intervening set with the weight, give one value 
 of K. The second half of the second set without the weight and 
 the first half of the third set combined with the second set with the 
 weight give another value of K, and so on. Five of these independ- 
 ent determinations will usually give a satisfactory mean value of K. 
 The change in K with temperature is a function of the temperature 
 coefficient of steel, which may be taken as 0.000011 for 1 C. For 
 a change of 1 in temperature the corresponding change in log K is 
 
 2 log (1.000011) =0.00001. 
 
 The method of separating the intermediate sets of oscillations with- 
 out the weight into two parts is shown in the following example. A 
 convenient form of computation is also given. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 25 
 
 MOMENT OP INERTIA. OSCILLATIONS, without weight. 
 
 Station, Cheltenham, Md. Date, April 28, 1909. 
 
 Magnetometer No. 26. Magnet 26 L. 
 
 Chronometer No. 1107, daily rate gaining 8 8 .1 on mean time. , 
 
 Number of 
 oscillations. 
 
 Chronometer 
 time. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Extreme scale 
 readings. 
 
 Time of 70 
 oscillations. 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 15 25 15.7 
 
 18.2 
 
 -22.8 
 
 +22.8 
 
 
 7 
 
 25 52.6 
 
 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 26 29.5 
 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 27 06.4 
 
 
 
 
 
 28 
 
 27 43.2 
 
 
 
 
 
 35 
 
 28 20.1 
 
 
 
 
 
 42 
 
 28 57.1 
 
 
 
 
 
 49 
 
 29 34.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 18.1 
 
 
 
 m. s. 
 
 70 
 
 15 31 24.8 
 
 
 
 
 6 09.1 
 
 77 
 
 32 01.6 
 
 
 
 
 09.0 
 
 84 
 
 32 38.5 
 
 
 
 
 09.0 
 
 91 
 
 33 15.3 
 
 
 
 
 08.9 
 
 98 
 
 33 52.2 
 
 
 
 
 09.0 
 
 105 
 
 34 29.0 
 
 
 
 
 08,9 
 
 112 
 
 35 06.0 
 
 
 
 
 08.9 
 
 119 
 
 35 42.9 
 
 18.1 
 
 -17.9 
 
 + 17.9 
 
 08.9 
 
 
 Means 
 
 18.13 
 
 
 
 J 6 09.00 . 
 i 6 08.925 
 
 
 
 First 
 
 Second 
 
 
 
 half. 
 
 half. 
 
 
 s. 
 
 s. 
 
 t (preceding set)= 17. 97 
 
 Time of 1 5. 27143 
 
 5. 27036 
 
 t 1'= O.16 
 
 oscil. 
 
 
 * (following set) = 18.27 
 
 Corr'n for -49 
 
 -49 
 
 t-f=+0.U 
 
 rate , 
 
 
 
 T 5.27094 
 
 5. 26987 
 
 
 Log T2 
 
 1.44378 
 
 1.44360 
 
 
 "( 
 
 ' 5400 \ 
 
 60 
 
 60 
 
 ,5400-A/ 
 
 
 [!+(*-*')<?] 
 
 - 5 
 
 + 4 
 
 
 "(D* 
 
 1. 44433 
 
 1. 44424 
 
 
 (T? 
 
 27.818 
 
 27.812 
 
26 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Cheltenham, Md. 
 Magnetometer No. 26. 
 
 COMPUTATION OF MOMENT OF INERTIA. 
 
 April 28, 1909. 
 Inertia ring A. 
 
 Chron. 
 time. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 T 2 
 
 Ti* 
 and 
 2V T* 
 
 Log T* 
 and 
 log Ki 
 
 Log T*Ki 
 and 
 log(7V-r*) 
 
 log IT 
 
 lo g A' 2 o 
 
 ft. 771. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 14 32 
 
 
 27.824 
 
 1. 44437 
 
 
 
 
 15 05 
 
 17.97 
 
 [27.821] 43.409 2.47036 
 
 3. 91473 
 
 
 
 15 29 
 
 
 27.818 
 
 15.588 
 
 
 1. 19279 
 
 2. 72194 
 
 2.-72196 
 
 15 32 
 
 
 27.812 
 
 1.44429 
 
 
 
 
 15 52 
 
 18.27 
 
 [27.816] 
 
 43. 419 2. 47036 
 
 3.91465 
 
 
 
 16 11 
 
 27.820 15.603 
 
 1. 19321 
 
 2. 72144 
 
 2. 72146 
 
 16 14 
 
 27.841 1.44433 
 
 
 
 
 16 36 
 
 18.53 [27.818] 
 
 43. 416 
 
 2. 47037 
 
 3. 91470 
 
 
 
 16 52 
 
 
 27.794 
 
 15.598 
 
 
 1. 19307 
 
 2. 72163 2. 72164 
 
 16 55 
 
 
 27.820 
 
 
 1.44439 
 
 
 
 17 12 
 
 18.95 [27.822] 
 
 43.409 
 
 2.' 47037 
 
 3. 91476 
 
 
 17 27 
 
 27.824 
 
 15.587 
 
 
 1. 19276 
 
 2.72200 
 
 2.72201 
 
 17 30 
 
 27.835 
 
 
 1.44458 
 
 
 
 - , 
 
 17 48 
 
 19.33 | [27.834] 
 
 43. 433 
 
 2.47038 
 
 3. 91496 
 
 
 
 18 19 
 
 27.834 
 
 15.599 
 
 
 1. 19310 
 
 2.72186 
 
 2. 72187 
 
 18 22 
 
 27.846 
 
 
 1.44476 
 
 
 
 18 40 
 
 20.15 ! [27.846] 
 
 43.445 
 
 2. 47039 
 
 3. 91515 
 
 
 19 06 
 
 27.845 
 
 15.599 
 
 
 1. 19310 
 
 2. 72205 2. 72205 
 
 
 ftCean 
 
 2. 72183 
 
 JT=527.02 at 20 C. 
 
 When the weight is a cylindrical bar, there is usually a place pro- 
 vided in the stirrup for suspending it above or below the magnet. 
 When a ring is used, it must be balanced on top of the magnet, so as 
 to be horizontal and with its center in the line of suspension. To 
 facilitate placing it in this position, a wooden block is provided having 
 a socket in which the magnet will fit with its upper surface even with 
 the surface of the block. Suitable marks on the block indicate the 
 position in which the ring must be placed in order to be symmetrical 
 with respect to the center of the magnet. It will, in general, be neces- 
 sary to increase the number of suspension fibers in order to support 
 the increased weight. 
 
 The moment of inertia of a magnet will be affected by any change 
 in its dimensions or mass. A screwing up or unscrewing of one of the 
 end cells would produce a slight change of length. The removal of a 
 large amount of accumulated rust would produce an appreciable 
 change of mass. The magnet must be carefully protected therefore 
 from these or similar changes, and in case such a change should take 
 place its moment of inertia must be redetermined. 
 
 TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENT. 
 
 When the temperature of a magnet increases, its magnetic moment 
 decreases, and vice versa. Experiments have shown that the rate of 
 change is not uniform, but increases with increase of temperature. In 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 27 
 
 view of the small change of temperature usually experienced during 
 a set of horizontal intensity observations and the partial elimination 
 of its effect by a symmetrical arrangement of oscillations and deflec- 
 tions, no material error will be introduced by the assumption that 
 the rate of change is uniform for ordinary temperatures. 
 
 If M and M r be the values of the magnetic moment of a magnet at 
 temperatures t and t' and q be the temperature coefficient: 
 
 M(t'-t) 
 
 From an inspection of the oscillation and deflection formulas, it 
 will be seen that if two sets of observations of either class be made at 
 different temperatures, the value of q may be computed, provided 
 means are taken to allow for change of H. At an observatory this 
 may readily be done with the aid of the continuous record of the 
 magnetograph. In any case, the effect may be nearly eliminated by 
 observing alternately at high and low temperatures and combining 
 two sets of observations at about the same temperature with an inter- 
 vening set at a different temperature. Care must be taken to main- 
 tain a given temperature for a sufficient time to make sure that the 
 magnet and thermometer are at the same temperature, and rapid 
 changes should be avoided. If both oscillations and deflections are 
 made at high and low temperatures, the change in H is obtained from 
 the observations themselves. If the observations are made in a room 
 which can be heated and cooled artificially, no special apparatus is 
 required. Otherwise the value of q is most conveniently determined 
 by deflection observations, the deflecting magnet being surrounded 
 by a water jacket, which may be filled alternately with hot and cold 
 water. In this case allowance must be made for the effect of change 
 of temperature upon the length of the bar. 
 
 The computation of q may be conveniently made by logarithms, 
 bearing in mind that for our purposes log (l + (t t')g) may be 
 replaced by (t t f ) [log (1 +g)] without materially affecting the results. 
 
 log M f = log M+ (t-f) log (1 +g) 
 
 log Jf'-log M 
 
 log 
 
 If special deflection observations have been made, they give directly 
 
 TT TT 
 
 log M - log jj-, - log M' - log M 
 
 H H 
 
 It will be sufficient to use the approximate values of --,, and -%, 
 
 2 2 
 
 namely, -5 ^ and - -- . when the induction and distribution 
 
 j i r s sin u r $ sin u 
 
28 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 coefficients are not known, r and r t being the values of the deflection 
 distance at temperatures t and t' . 
 
 A check on the correctness of an adopted value of q may be obtained 
 from the values of log M determined in the course of a season's work. 
 When all the values have been reduced to a common temperature, 
 they should show a fairly uniform decrease with lapse of time. An 
 error in the adopted temperature coefficient would be indicated by 
 deviations from a uniform change which conform in general with the 
 changes in temperature . 
 
 INDUCTION COEFFICIENT. 
 
 When a magnet is placed in a magnetic field its magnetic moment 
 is temporarily changed by induction by an amount which is propor- 
 tional to the component of the field directed parallel to the axis of the 
 magnet. The rate of change, i. e., the ratio of the moment of the 
 magnet to the change produced by a unit field, is called the induction 
 coefficient, 7i. The change in the magnetic moment M of a magnet 
 placed parallel to a field of intensity H would be hMH, or fiH, 
 // = Mh, called the induction factor, being the change in the magnetic 
 moment produced by a field of unit intensity. The induction coeffi- 
 cient is not constant, but varies with the strength of magnetization of 
 the magnet. It is different also according as the induction tends to 
 increase or decrease the magnetic moment; the more strongly a 
 magnet is magnetized, the less susceptible it becomes to increase of 
 magnetization by induction, but the more susceptible to decrease. 
 In the oscillation observations induction increases the magnetic 
 moment of the magnet, and the induction factor may be taken as con- 
 stant. In the deflection observations the effect of induction is to 
 reduce the magnetic moment of the magnet, but the magnet is in 
 general so nearly in the prime vertical that the effect is very small, 
 and hence the assumption that the induction factor is the same as for 
 the oscillations does not introduce an appreciable error. 
 
 Of the various methods for determining the induction coefficient, 
 the one devised by Lamont has been used exclusively by the Coast 
 and Geodetic Survey. The magnet of which the induction coeffi- 
 cient is desired is used as a deflector with its axis vertical, in the ver- 
 tical plane at right angles to the suspended magnet, but with its 
 center some distance above or below the horizontal plane through that 
 magnet. Observations are made first with north end up, magnet up, 
 and then with north end down, magnet down. In the former position 
 the magnetic moment of the magnet is decreased by induction, and in 
 the latter is increased. If care is taken to maintain constant conditions , 
 except for the inversion of the deflecting magnet, the change in the 
 deflection angle will be a measure of the change in the magnetic 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 29 
 
 moment due to the inductive effect of the vertical intensity, Z. In 
 the first case 
 
 H C 
 
 M(lhZ) 
 and in the second case 
 
 H _C_ 
 
 M(l + hZ) sin u 2 
 
 \-\-JiZ sin u 2 
 
 + ^i ) 
 
 This method involves the assumption that the induction coefficient 
 is the same whether it tends to increase or decrease the moment of the 
 magnet. As the corrections for induction are very small, this is a 
 safe assumption for all except the most refined observations. 
 
 As the induction coefficient is a very small quantity, the change in the 
 deflection angle (u 2 u^) is small also and a small error in observa- 
 tion or a small change in the relative position of the two magnets will 
 materially affect the result. It is usual to extend the observations by 
 varying the position of the deflecting magnet, as indicated in the fol- 
 lowing sample set, and also by making several sets using different 
 horizontal and vertical distances. For making the observations a 
 special L-shaped deflection bar is provided, to which is pivoted a 
 vertical arm so arranged that it may be rotated in a vertical plane 
 parallel to the suspended magnet, about a center in the horizontal 
 plane through the suspended magnet. 
 
30 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Cheltenham, Md. 
 Magnetometer No. 29. 
 Horizontal distance, 21 cm. 
 
 June 16, 1905. 
 Vertical distance, 2 cm. 
 
 No. 
 
 Position of deflecting 
 magnet. 
 
 North end. 
 
 Horizontal circle readings. 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 1 
 
 East 
 
 up 
 
 up 
 
 
 
 
 53 32 40 
 
 53 32 40 
 
 32 40 
 
 2 
 
 East 
 
 down 
 
 down 
 
 53 56 10 
 
 56 10 
 
 53 56 10 
 
 3 
 
 East 
 
 down 
 
 up 
 
 43 05 10 
 
 05 50 
 
 43 05 30 
 
 4 
 
 East 
 
 up 
 
 down 
 
 43 23 40 
 
 23 50 
 
 43 23 45 
 
 5 
 
 West 
 
 up 
 
 down 
 
 54 08 10 
 
 08 10 
 
 54 08 10 
 
 6 
 
 West 
 
 down 
 
 up 
 
 54 28 00 
 
 28 10 
 
 54 28 06 
 
 7 
 
 West 
 
 down 
 
 down 
 
 42 37 30 
 
 37 30 
 
 42 37 30 
 
 8 
 
 West 
 
 up 
 
 up 
 
 
 13 03 00 
 
 03 20 
 
 43 03 10 
 
 ft. m. 
 
 
 Time of beginning 9 55 Temp. 27. 2 
 
 2 ui East (1-3) 10 27 10 
 
 Time of ending 10 25 Temp. 27. 6 
 
 2 tt, West (6-8) 11 24 55 
 
 
 Mean 
 i* 
 
 2u 2 East (2-4) 
 
 10 5G 02 
 2 4400 
 
 co log (#=0.20085) 0.6971 
 co log tan (7= 70 25') 9. 5511 
 
 10 32 25 
 
 log tan J(-Mi) 
 co log tan j(uj+tti) 
 log (ft= 0.0074) 
 
 0. 6047 
 1. 0172 
 
 2t/ 2 West (5-7) 
 Mean 
 i 
 
 11 30 40 
 
 11 01 32 
 2 45 23 
 
 7.8701 
 
 " (JfiM-697) 2.8432 
 
 i(uj-tti) 1 23 
 
 " (^-5. 17) 0.7133 
 
 i(ttj+ui) 5 29 23 
 
 DISTRIBUTION COEFFICIENTS. 
 
 n the deflection formula 
 2 
 
 H 
 ~M l 
 
 r 3 sin 
 
 r 2 r 
 
 the distribution coefficients P and Q may be obtained by making 
 deflections at three distances and solving the three resulting equations 
 
 TJ 
 
 for the three unknowns , ., P, and Q. 
 
 , ., 
 
 .\L 
 
 Let 
 
 Then 
 
 sn H 
 
 r sn u 
 
 3 _ . 
 
 ^ (r 3 2 - 
 
 - r 
 
 * - r 2 2 ) 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 31 
 
 In case the relative lengths of the two magnets are such that Q is 
 nearly zero, the term 4 becomes so small that it may be neglected and 
 
 the value of P may be computed from deflections at two distances. 
 Using the same notation as above : 
 
 S 4 X 4 
 Al 1+ ^ 
 
 When P is small it may be computed with sufficient accuracy by the 
 formula 
 
 9..- 9. 
 
 A,-\ogA 2 ) 
 
 For deflection distances of 30 cm. and 40 cm. this becomes 
 P = 4737 (log A,- log 4,) 
 
 It is evident that a small error of observation in the deflections will 
 have a large effect on the accuracy of P, and little dependence can be 
 placed on the result from a single set of observations. It is only 
 from an extended series that a reliable value of the distribution 
 
 coefficients can be obtained. It is also evident from the form of the 
 
 r 2 r 2 
 factor r 2_y 2 that it is important to have the two deflection distances 
 
 differ by a considerable amount. Too short a deflection distance is 
 undesirable, however, since any uncertainty in the value of P has 
 too great an effect on the resulting horizontal intensity, and too long 
 a distance reduces the size of the deflection angle so much that a 
 small error of observation has a large effect on the result. For the 
 size of magnets generally used, the distances 30 cm. and 40 cm. are found 
 to be the most satisfactory. 
 
 The above formula for P may be used also to find the correction to 
 an adopted value of P required to harmonize subsequent observa- 
 tions. If it is found after a series of observations that the two values 
 
 TT 
 
 of log j^ computed from deflections at two distances differ system- 
 atically, one being greater than the other on the average, the cor- 
 rection to the adopted value of P is given by the formula 
 
 JP = 
 
 the quantity in brackets being the mean value for the series. 
 
 As already pointed out, approximate values of the distribution 
 coefficients may be computed from the dimensions of the magnets. 
 
32 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 If 21 and 2\ be the pole distances of the long and short magnets, 
 respectively, then 
 
 P = 2l 2 - 3Z X 2 Q = 3Z 4 - 
 
 disregarding the small terms depending on the relative diameters of 
 the magnets. Borgen concluded from his experiments that the pole 
 distance is on the average about 0.805 the length of the magnet, and 
 this conclusion was confirmed in part by the standardization obser- 
 vations at Kew prior to 1904 (Dr. C.Chree, "Law of Action between 
 Magnets." L., E., and D. Phil. Mag., Aug. 1, 1904). From the 
 above formula it will be seen that P should be zero when ll\ = 1.225, 
 and this ratio has been adopted for the lengths of the two magnets 
 in nearly all of the magnetometers which have been made or remod- 
 eled by the Coast and Geodetic Survey. At the same time it has 
 been the practice to regard Q as negligible and to determine the value 
 of P from deflections at two distances in the manner explained above. 
 For seven of the eight magnetometers to which the above ratio 
 applies, the value of P derived in this way is in every case between 
 and 1.0, the average value being 0.54. 
 
 To show that this assumption is justifiable, let us examine the 
 results for five magnetometers of the design shown in Figure 3, 
 having magnets 7.375 cm. and 6.025 cm. in length, i. e., in the ratio of 
 1.224 to 1, and arranged for deflections at distances of 30 cm. and 40 
 cm. Using Borgen' s ratio of pole distance to length of magnet, his 
 formulas give: 
 
 Now suppose a series of deflections at the two distances gives on the 
 average 
 
 log A M - log A 4Q = - 0.00020 
 
 Assuming Q = Q P = 4737 (log A 30 - log ^4 40 ) -- 0.95 
 
 which is about the upper limit of the values found for this type of 
 magnetometer. On the other hand, if we assume P = 0, Q may be 
 computed by the formula: 
 
 Q = loge 10 -^L. Oog A, - log A 2 ) = - 546 
 
 '2 ~~'l 
 
 Finally, we may adopt the value of Q = - 350 computed from Bor- 
 gen' s formula, and find the value of P which will satisfy the equation: 
 
 log l+ + ao-logl+ + 40 = -0.00020 
 
 P Q 
 
 As - a and 4 are both very small quantities, we may put 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE CONSTANTS OF A MAGNETOMETER. 33 
 
 Hence 
 
 = log 
 
 l + 
 
 log (l + ^ 30 - log ( 
 
 ^4o-log (1+^)30 -0.00020 =-0.00007 
 and P = 4737(- 0.00007) =-0.33 
 
 The effect of the different values of P and Q on the resulting value 
 
 of H may be determined by computing the value of log ( 
 for the three cases. 
 
 I + + 
 
 
 P=-0.95 Q=0. 
 
 P=0 Q=-546. 
 
 P=-0.33 Q=-350. 
 
 r=30cm. 
 
 r=40cm. 
 
 r=30cm. 
 
 r=40cm. 
 
 r=30cm. 
 
 r=40cm. 
 
 p 
 
 r2 
 Q 
 
 7-4 
 
 -.001056 
 
 
 -.000594 
 
 
 
 
 -.000674 
 
 
 -.000213 
 
 -.000367 
 -.000432 
 
 -.000206 
 -.000137 
 
 3 
 
 .998944 
 
 .999406 
 
 .999326 
 
 . 999787 
 
 .999201 
 
 .999657 
 
 mi 
 
 9. 99954 
 
 9. 99974 
 
 9. 99971 
 
 9. 99991 
 
 9.99965 
 
 9.99985 
 
 Mean 
 
 -.00036 
 
 -.00019 
 
 -.00025 
 
 It will be seen that the difference between the logarithms of the 
 factor for the two distances is in each case the assumed difference 
 between log A 30 and log A M , but the mean of the two is greatest for the 
 assumption that P = and least for the case in which Q = Q. To 
 determine the effect on a resulting value of H we must take the square 
 
 root offl+^ + ^jor divide its logarithm by two. The effect of the 
 
 above three combinations of distribution coefficients would therefore 
 be to diminish the value of log H by .00018, .000095 and .000125 
 respectively. The ratio of the first two values is the number of 
 which the logarithm is .000085 or 1.0002; that is, they differ by only 
 1 part in 5000. Consequently the error involved in the case of the 
 Coast and Geodetic Survey magnetometers in assuming that Q is 
 negligible does not amount to more than 1 part in 5000 in H and is 
 probably less than that, and is therefore well within the probable 
 error of observation and reduction in field work under favorable 
 conditions. 
 
 7721311 3 
 
34 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 DEFLECTION DISTANCES. 
 
 In a magnetometer with fiber suspension it is impossible to avoid 
 a slight variation in the relative positions of the suspended magnet 
 and the deflection bars and a corresponding variation in the deflection 
 distances. To eliminate the error to which this might give rise, the 
 instruments are made either with two deflection bars, one on either 
 side, or with a single bar having its middle point over the center of the 
 magnetometer. The deflection observations can then be made one- 
 half with magnet east and one-half with magnet west and a small 
 increase of the deflection distances on one side will be balanced by a 
 decrease on the other side. 
 
 The distance between corresponding marks on the two bars or on the 
 two halves of the single bar is twice the deflection distance. With the 
 single straight bar, such as is used in the Kew and India Survey pat- 
 tern magnetometers, this is readily obtained by direct comparison with 
 a standard meter. Experiments at Kew have shown that bars of this 
 type require a slight correction for bending, amounting to an increase 
 of about one part in 10000 in the case of the instruments of the latter 
 type in use by the Coast and Geodetic Survey (Fig. 4). 
 
 In the Coast and Geodetic Survey pattern magnetometer (Fig. 3), the 
 two bars are so constructed that their inner ends overlap and are held 
 together by two screws. It is thus possible to fasten them together 
 when not in position on the magnetometer and measure the deflection 
 distances as readily as for a single bar. These bars are very light, 
 since the outer ends are hollow, and it has therefore been considered 
 unnecessary to investigate the question of bending. 
 
DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS ON LAND. 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 
 
 Selection of stations. The conditions to be satisfied in selecting 
 a magnetic station are freedom from present and probable future local 
 disturbance, whether natural or artificial, combined with convenience 
 of access. A station on suitably situated public property, or property 
 belonging to an educational institution, is to be preferred, as it is less 
 likely to be disturbed or affected by change of the immediate sur- 
 roundings. Proximity of electric railways, masses of iron or steel, 
 gas or water pipes, buildings of stone or brick should be avoided. 
 A quarter of a mile from the first, 500 feet from the second, 200 
 feet from the third and fourth may be considered safe distances. 
 The station should be at least 50 feet from a building of any kind. 
 If any doubt arises in the selection of a station as to the existence of 
 local disturbance, two intervisible points 100 yards or more apart 
 should be selected and the magnetic bearing of the line joining them 
 determined at each end. A lack of agreement between the two 
 results would be evidence of local disturbance. Similar tests should 
 then be made in other directions until a satisfactory location is found. 
 
 Description of station. Each point occupied should be described 
 with sufficient detail to render possible its recovery. The description 
 should begin with the general location of the park or field in which the 
 station is situated. This should include the approximate distance 
 and direction from the center of the town or from some point which 
 can be definitely located on a map, so that a check on the latitude and 
 longitude may be available. In case a new station is selected in a 
 town where observations had been made before, the relative positions 
 of the new and old stations should be given, if possible. 
 
 There should follow measured distances to the fences or other fixed 
 objects in the immediate vicinity of the station and a description of 
 the manner in which the station is marked. If a meridian line is 
 established, the distance to, and location of, the second stone should 
 be given, the magnetic station being selected so as to form one end 
 of the line. It is desirable also to give. a rough sketch showing the 
 relation of the station to surrounding objects, indicating on it the 
 direction of north (which should always be toward the top of the 
 sketch), and the direction of the marks of which the true bearings are 
 determined. 
 
 Marks. These marks should be well-defined objects as nearly in 
 the horizon as practicable and likely to be available for future use. 
 
 35 
 
36 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 It is desirable to have the one selected for reference fnark in azimuth 
 and declination observations in a souther!}" direction, so that it may 
 be sighted upon through the opening in the south side of the observing 
 tent. It should be a quarter of a mile or more from the station if 
 possible, so that an error of two or three inches in reoccupying the 
 station or a change of that amount in the position of the marking 
 stone would not materially affect the azimuth of the mark. As an 
 angle of 1' subtends approximately 1 inch at a distance of 300 feet, 
 the uncertainty at any given distance may be readily computed. 
 
 Marking of station. Every station' sn'ould be marked in as per- 
 manent a manner as conditions will warrant, to assist in its subse- 
 quent recovery. Either a natural or artificial stone, a glazed drain 
 pipe, or a post of hard wood can usually be obtained. To avoid being 
 disturbed, the station mark should project little, if any, above the 
 surface of the ground, and it should extend two feet or more into 
 the ground. 
 
 Meridian line. When a meridian line is to be established the 
 azimuth observations must be made with especial care and the com- 
 putations revised before the stones are set. The line should be not 
 less than 300 feet long (if possible not less than 500 feet), and extra 
 precautions should be taken to secure the marking stones against 
 future disturbance. 
 
 Repeat stations. Where observations are to be made at an old 
 station for the purpose of determining the secular variation, especial 
 effort should be made to reoccupy the precise point at which the 
 earlier observations were made. Any changes in the immediate sur- 
 roundings should be noted in the description of station. If local 
 conditions have changed to such an extent that a reoccupation is 
 clearly undesirable, then a new station must be established. There 
 may be cases, however, in which it will be best to reoccupy the old 
 station and also establish a new one; e. g., the old station, while not 
 satisfying the requirements of future availability, may still suffice to 
 determine the secular variation since the former observations. When, 
 owing to change in the immediate surroundings or defect of the 
 original description, it is impossible to locate the exact point from 
 the measured distances, the desired result may sometimes be accom- 
 plished with the aid of the bearings of prominent objects. Having 
 three well-defined objects which were connected by angular measures 
 at the time of the former occupation, successive trials with the the- 
 odolite will serve to locate the spot at which those angular measures 
 are reproduced. 
 
 Care of instruments. Care should be taken to keep the instruments 
 in good adjustment and free from dust. The magnets should be 
 touched with the hands as little as possible and should always be 
 wiped dr} r with clean chamois or soft tissue paper at the close of 
 
GENEBAL DIRECTIONS. 37 
 
 observations to prevent them from rusting. They must not be 
 dropped or allowed to touch each other or other iron or steel objects. 
 They should be kept in the instrument box with north end down, 
 packed snugly to avoid jars in transportation. The dip needles 
 should be wiped with tissue paper both before and after observations 
 and the pivots cleaned with pith. In reversing polarities, the bar 
 magnets should be drawn smoothly from center to ends of the needle, 
 as nearly parallel to the axis of the needle as possible. In case the 
 needle projects above the surface of the reversing block the magnets 
 must not bear heavily upon it. 
 
 Chronometer. The utmost care must be exercised in carrying the 
 chronometer. A pocket chronometer requires more careful handling 
 than a watch to secure a constant rate. It must be kept at as uniform 
 a temperature as possible and wound at the same hour each day. It 
 must be protected from jarring or shaking. Past experience indi- 
 cates that the best results are obtained when it is carried in the 
 trousers watch pocket. Where unusual rough travel is anticipated 
 it is well to compare the chronometer with a well-regulated watch 
 both before and after the journey. At least once a week, and at 
 every station if possible without serious delay, the chronometer 
 correction on standard time should be obtained by means of Western 
 Union or other telegraphic time signals. The chronometer correction 
 and rate are given the sign with which they must be applied. For a 
 chronometer which is fast and gaining they are both negative. 
 
 Order of observations. When a complete instrumental outfit is 
 supplied the observations at a station comprise: Morning and after- 
 noon azimuth, latitude at noon; one set of dip with each of two 
 needles; two sets each of declination, oscillations, and deflections; 
 angular measures between prominent objects. It is desirable that 
 the azimuth observations should be made at nearly equal times 
 (preferably not less than two hours) before and after apparent noon, 
 giving nearly the same altitude of the sun for the morning and after- 
 noon sets. The effect on the azimuth of a small error in latitude 
 is in that way eliminated. Latitude observations should extend not 
 more than 15 minutes before or after apparent noon (maximum 
 altitude of the sun). 
 
 As the declination and horizontal intensity are usually changing 
 more rapidly in the morning than in the afternoon, it is preferable 
 to make the magnetometer observations in the afternoon. They 
 should be made in the order: Declination, oscillations, deflections, 
 deflections, oscillations, declination. The second set of deflections 
 and oscillations should be made with magnets inverted, and the 
 horizontal circle should be shifted in azimuth before the second set 
 of declination, in order to bring the readings upon a different part 
 of the circle. 
 
38 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Thermometer. The same thermometer should be used throughout 
 a set of horizontal intensity observations. It should be placed in 
 the hole in the magnet house during oscillations and near to the 
 deflecting magnet during deflections, either in the end of the deflec- 
 tion bar or (in magnetometers of the India Survey pattern) in the 
 box in which the magnet is inclosed. It should be changed from 
 one bar to the other with the magnet. Care must be taken to stop 
 up the hole in the magnet house when the thermometer is not in it. 
 Before beginning observations the thermometer should be examined 
 to see that the mercury column is not broken and that none of the 
 mercury is in the upper recess. A broken column can usually be 
 joined by holding the thermometer in the hand and striking the 
 wrist sharply against the knee, or by attaching it securely to a string 
 and swinging it rapidly in a circle. 
 
 Agreement of results. Before leaving a station the computation 
 should be carried far enough to show r that there is nothing essentially 
 wrong with the observations. In good work two consecutive sets of 
 azimuth should agree within one minute and the morning and after- 
 noon sets within two minutes. A greater difference is usually due 
 to lack of adjustment or level of the theodolite, or to a mistake in 
 pointing on the wrong limb of the sun, or in using the wrong line of 
 , the diaphragm. In case the morning and afternoon azimuth obser- 
 vations give results differing by more than five minutes, the observa- 
 tions should be repeated. The two sets of declination should agree 
 within two or three minutes when corrected approximately for 
 diurnal variation (see Table IX). The values of log Mil for the 
 two sets of oscillations should not differ by more than 0.00100, and 
 
 TT 
 
 the values of log ,, should agree equally well. The corresponding 
 
 agreement to be expected in the values of T and u can easily be com- 
 puted for a particular magnetometer and a particular locality. 
 
 When the dip results for the two needles differ by more than five 
 minutes in excess of the normal difference of the needles, the observa- 
 tions should be repeated. Thus,, if the observations show that on 
 the average needle No. 1 gives a value of dip three minutes greater 
 than No. 2, the observations should be repeated when No. 1 gives a 
 result more than eight minutes greater or two minutes less than 
 No. 2. 
 
 The record should be kept with hard pencil (or fountain pen) and 
 entered at once on the proper form (not kept on blank paper and 
 afterwards copied onto the form.) All computations should be made 
 in ink or inked over before the record is sent to the Office. The 
 different sheets will be punched and fastened together in the covers 
 provided (Form 367), arranged in the following order: (1) Descrip- 
 tion of station, angles connecting the azimuth mark with other 
 
EQUIPMENT. 39 
 
 prominent objects, and chronometer correction on Standard time 
 (Form 441), (2) latitude observations (Form 267), (3) azimuth 
 observations (Form 266), (4) azimuth computation (Form 269), 
 (5) declination (Form 37), (6) dip (Form 42), (7) oscillations (Form 
 41), (8) deflections (Form 39). 
 
 Abstract. Before the record is sent to the Office the computation 
 should be completed and a copy made of the results and also of such 
 quantities as would be required to replace the computation in case 
 the record is lost (Form 442). This includes brief description of 
 station, chronometer corrections on Standard time, sun's maximum 
 altitude from latitude observations; mean of chronometer, horizontal 
 and vertical circle readings for each set of azimuth; mean reading of 
 mark and magnet, mean scale reading erect and inverted for each 
 declination set; time of whole number of oscillations and effect of 
 90 torsion, mean value of 2u for each deflection distance, tempera- 
 ture and time of each set of observations; the mean dip with each 
 needle for each half set (before and after reversal of polarities). 
 
 Computations. Five-place logarithms will be used. In the azi- 
 muth observations the means of circle readings will be carried to 
 whole seconds, means of times to tenths of a second; similarly in 
 computations. For declination observations, carry mean scale read- 
 ings to hundredths of a division, balance of computation to tenths of 
 a minute. For oscillations, compute time of one oscillation to four 
 decimal places, mean temperature to tenths of a degree. Compute 
 deflection angles to whole seconds. Dip computations will be carried 
 to tenths of a minute. 
 
 To secure the best results, particular attention should be paid to 
 the following points : 
 
 Be sure that all articles of iron and steel are removed to a safe distance 
 before beginning magnetic observations. 
 
 Be sure that the instrument is level and the levels in adjustment before 
 beginning observations, especially in latitude and azimuth observations. 
 
 Be careful to keep the magnets and dip needles dry and clean, espe- 
 cially the pivots of the dip needles. 
 
 Handle the chronometer with care at all times. 
 
 EQUIPMENT. 
 
 Observers engaged exclusively on magnetic work are usually pro- 
 vided with a theodolite magnetometer, a dip circle, a half-second 
 pocket chronometer, a tent, and minor accessories. When magnetic 
 observations are to be made only as opportunity offers in connection 
 with other branches of the field work of the Survey, the equipment 
 is often less complete, either a dip circle with special needles for total 
 intensity observations and a compass attachment for determination 
 of the magnetic declination or simply a compass declinometer for 
 
40 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 declination alone. In such cases the true meridian is usually known 
 from triangulation or else the instrumental equipment includes a 
 theodolite and timepiece with which the necessary astronomical 
 observations can be made. 
 
 In the descriptions of instruments and methods which follow, the 
 
 erm alidade will be used to designate the upper part of the instru- 
 
 ment to which are attached the verniers for reading the horizontal 
 
 circle and of which the motion is controlled by the upper clamp and 
 
 tangent screw. 
 
 LATITUDE FROM OBSERVATIONS OF THE SUN. 
 
 For the greater part of the United States only approximate values 
 of the latitude and longitude can be obtained from existing maps. 
 It is usual, therefore, to include latitude observations in the program 
 of work at a magnetic station, in order that the azimuth may be 
 determined from sun observations with the required accuracy. 
 The most convenient method involves the measurement of the sun's 
 altitude at or near apparent noon, using the small theodolite pro- 
 vided for the azimuth observations. 
 
 At apparent noon, when the sun is on the meridian 
 
 being the latitude of the place, the sun's zenith distance, and 
 d its declination, south zenith distance and north declination being 
 considered positive for the northern hemisphere. As the sun's decli- 
 nation changes so slowly (the hourly rate of change never amounts 
 to 1'), no appreciable error is introduced by assuming it constant for 
 a series of observations beginning a few minutes before noon and 
 ending a few minutes after noon. The maximum altitude may also 
 be taken as the meridian altitude. The observations are made in the 
 manner shown in the example given below. 
 
 The observations should begin about ten minutes before apparent 
 noon and end about ten minutes after noon. Before making the 
 observations, therefore, it is necessary to find the chronometer time 
 of apparent noon, at least approximately, by the method given below. 
 After setting up, leveling, and adjusting the theodolite, as explained 
 later in connection with azimuth observations, the method of observ- 
 ing is as follows : 
 
LATITUDE FROM OBSEKVATIONS OF THE SUN. 
 Form 267. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS or SUN FOR LATITUDE. 
 
 41 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 Theodolite of mag'r No. 20. 
 Chronometer No. 245. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 Temperature, 24 C. 
 
 Sun's 
 limb. 
 
 V.C. 
 
 Chronometer 
 time. 
 
 Vertical circle. 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 , 
 
 / // 
 
 / it 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 11 30 04 
 
 61 14 00 
 
 13 30 
 
 61 13 45 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 11 31 16 
 
 119 23 00 
 
 20 00 
 
 60 38 30 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 11 33 14 
 
 119 22 30 
 
 19 30 
 
 60 39 00 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 11 34 38 
 
 61 16 30 
 
 15 30 
 
 61 16 00 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 11 36 36 
 
 61 17 00 
 
 15 30 
 
 61 16 15 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 11 37 34 
 
 119 21 30 
 
 19 00 
 
 60 39 45 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 11 39 32 
 
 119 21 30 
 
 19 00 
 
 60 39 45 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 11 40 33 
 
 61 17 30 
 
 16 00 
 
 61 16 45 
 
 U 
 
 R 
 
 11 42 46 
 
 61 16 30 
 
 15 00 
 
 61 15 45 
 
 L 
 
 L 
 
 11 43 30 
 
 119 22 30 
 
 2000 
 
 60 38 45 
 
 
 Obs'd max. alt. 
 
 6058 15 
 
 
 R. &P. 
 
 27 
 
 
 h 
 
 60 57 48 
 
 
 r 
 
 29 02 12 
 
 
 8 
 
 17 06 18 
 
 
 4 
 
 46 08 30 
 
 With the vertical circle to the right of the telescope, point on the 
 sun with its disc bisected by the vertical line of the diaphragm and its 
 upper limb tangent to the horizontal line. Record the time of con- 
 tact as indicated by the chronometer and read and record both 
 verniers, A and B, of the vertical circle. Turn the alidade 180 in 
 azimuth and make another pointing on the sun, but with its lower 
 limb tangent to the horizontal line of the diaphragm, again recording 
 the time and vertical circle reading. As the vertical circle is usually 
 graduated from to 360, the reading in the first case will be the alti- 
 tude of the sun's upper limb, but the second reading must be subtracted 
 from 180 to get the altitude of the sun's lower limb. Combining the 
 two gives the altitude of the sun's center and eliminates the vertical 
 collimation error of the theodolite and the index error of the graduation. 
 The observations are continued for 15 or 20 minutes, reversing the 
 circle after the odd pointings, as shown in the above example. The 
 level of the instrument should be examined after the even pointings 
 and corrected if necessary. If the beginning is properly timed, the 
 maximum altitude will occur near the middle of the series. For the 
 field computation the pair of readings is selected which gives the 
 maximum altitude, and their mean, after being corrected for refraction 
 and parallax (Table I), is combined with the sun's declination to get 
 the latitude. The quantities for vertical circle left in the column 
 
42 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 headed "Mean" are really 180 minus the means of the two vernier 
 readings. 
 
 A more accurate value of latitude is obtained by utilizing all the 
 observations by the "method of circum-meridian altitudes/' ex- 
 plained in detail in most textbooks on spherical astronomy (see, for 
 example, Chauvenet, Vol. I, page 235). In view of the degree of 
 accuracy required in a magnetic survey, or possible with the small 
 theodolite ordinarily used, many approximations in the method of 
 reduction to the meridian may be made. If Ji be the sun's meridian 
 altitude, 7i its altitude (observed) at a time t before (or after) appar- 
 ent noon, then approximately: 
 
 , , 2 sin 2 M 
 
 h = h + cos (f> cos d esc = ,", 
 
 SllJ. J. 
 
 2 sin 2 bt 
 Let A = cos (/> cos d esc and m = ^rr 
 
 Then Ji = h -\- Am and <f> = d -\- r 
 
 % 
 
 Table III gives the values of m for different values of t and Table IV 
 gives the values of A for different values of </> and d. It will be seen 
 that A increases as the sun's zenith distance decreases, and the method 
 is therefore not well adapted for observations where the sun crosses 
 the meridian near the zenith. The following computation of the set 
 of observations given above will best illustrate the method. 
 
 Form 268. 
 
 COMPUTATION OF LATITUDE FROM CIRCUM-MERIDIAN ALTITUDES OF SUN. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 
 Date, August 5, 1910. 
 
 h. m. a. 
 
 Chron. correction on L. M. T. + 27 20 
 
 Local mean time of app. noon 12 05 53 
 Chron. time of apparent noon 11 38 33 
 
 t 
 
 m 
 
 A 
 
 A m 
 
 Reduced h of 
 sun's limb. 
 
 / // 
 
 61 16 57 
 60 40 51 
 
 Reduced h 
 of0 
 
 m. 8. 
 
 -8 29 
 -7 17 
 
 141 
 104 
 
 1.36 
 
 192 
 141 
 
 1 II 
 
 60 58 54 
 
 -5 19 
 
 56 
 
 
 76 
 
 60 40 16 
 
 -3 55 
 
 30 
 
 
 41 
 
 61 16 41 
 
 -1 57 
 
 8 
 
 
 11 
 
 61 16 26 
 
 -0 59 
 
 2 
 
 
 3 
 
 60 39 48 
 
 +0 59 
 +200 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 60 39 48 
 61 16 56 
 
 60 58 22 
 
 +4 13 
 +4 57 
 
 35 
 
 48 
 
 
 48 
 65 
 
 61 16 33 
 60 39 50 
 
 60 58 12 
 
 
 Mean 
 
 60 58 25 
 
 
 R. &P. 
 
 - 27 
 
 
 h 
 
 60 57 58 
 
 
 C 
 
 290202 
 
 
 9 
 
 17 06 19 
 
 
 * 
 
 46 08 21 
 
LATITUDE FROM OBSERVATIONS OF THE SUN. 43 
 
 In order to obtain the values of t, the time of observation before or 
 after apparent noon, it is necessary to find the chronometer time of 
 apparent noon. The chronometer correction on local mean time is 
 usually obtained from the observations of the sun for azimuth and 
 time, as will be seen later, but it may be obtained also from an approx- 
 imate value of the longitude and the chronometer correction on 
 standard time, as follows: For Smyrna Mills, Me., suppose the ap- 
 proximate longitude, 68 08'. 5, or 4 h 32 m 34 s , to be obtained from a 
 map. By comparison with Western Union telegraphic time signals on 
 August 4, 1910, chronometer No. 245 was 6 s . fast on 75th meridian 
 mean time. On August 5 it was 5 s . 8 fast, showing a loss of s . 2 per 
 day. 
 
 m. s. 
 
 At noon August 5 chronometer No. 245 correction on 75th mer. m. t 6 
 
 Smyrna Mills east of 75th meridian 27 26 
 
 Therefore chronometer No. 245 correction on local mean time +27 20 
 
 To find the local mean time of apparent noon, we must know the 
 difference between mean time and apparent time; that is, the equa- 
 tion of time, E. This may be found in any ephemeris. On page 128 
 of the American Ephemeris for 1910, the value of E at Greenwich 
 apparent noon on August 5 is found to be 5 m 53 s . 7 and decreasing at 
 the rate of s . 23 per hour. Hence, for Smyrna Mills apparent noon, 
 which occurs 4 h 32 m later, the value of E would be 5 m 53 8 .7- l s .0 = 
 5 m 52 s . 7. This is the amount which must be added to apparent time 
 in order to obtain mean time. As the equation of time for apparent 
 noon never differs from the equation of time for mean noon by as 
 much as s . 2, the latter may be used when the sun's ephemeris for 
 apparent noon is not available. The apparent time of apparent 
 noon is always 12 h 00 m 00 s , hence the mean time of apparent noon at 
 Smyrna Mills on August 5, 1910, was 12 h 05 m 53 s . The chronometer 
 was found to be 27 m 20 s slow of local mean time. Hence the chro- 
 nometer time of apparent noon was 1 1 h 38 m 33 s . Expressed analytically : 
 Chronometer time of apparent noon = mean time of apparent noon 
 chronometer correction, bearing in mind that the correction is con- 
 sidered positive when the chronometer is slow and negative when it 
 is fast. By subtracting the chronometer time of apparent noon 
 from the chronometer time of each observation, the corresponding 
 value of t is found. This is the argument required for obtaining m 
 from Table III. 
 
 For obtaining the values of A from Table IV only approximate 
 values of cf> and d are required, but as the value of d is needed later it 
 is just as well to compute it at this point. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 Chronometer time of apparent noon 11 38 33 
 
 Chronometer correction on 75th meridian mean time - 06 
 
 75th meridian time slow on Greenwich mean time. . . +5 00 00 
 
 Greenwich mean time of local apparent noon 4 38 27 
 
44 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 This is the Greenwich mean time for which the sun's declination is 
 required. By referring to page 129 of the American Ephemeris for 
 1910 it will be found that the sun's declination at Greenwich mean 
 noon on August 5 was 17 09' 25". 8 N., and decreasing at the rate of 
 40 / M9 per hour. This rate is not uniform, however, the value for 
 noon of the 6th being 40 ".88. As the declination at 4 h 38 m 27 8 , or 
 4 h .64 after noon is required, we must find the average hourly change 
 for that interval, or, what is approximately the same thing, the change 
 for the middle of the interval, or 2 h .32 after noon. As the hourly 
 change increased 0".69 in 24 hours, it increased about T V of of that 
 amount, or 0".07 in 2.3 hours, and the desired average value for the 
 interval is therefore 40".19 + 0".07 = 40".26. 
 
 Sun's declination at Greenwich mean noon Aug. 5 ................... 17 09 25.8 N . 
 
 Change for 4 h .64=4.64X40".26=186".8 ....... ...................... -3 06.8 
 
 Sun's declination at 4 h 38 m 27 after noon ................. '-/. ? v ....... 17 06 19. I* . 
 
 In practice it is sufficient to carry the hourly change to tenths of 
 seconds only, and the allowance for second differences may then be 
 made by inspection. In fact, in most cases second differences might 
 be neglected entirely, as the maximum error would be only 3 ".5 in 
 assuming that the tabular value of hourly change is uniform for 12 
 hours before and 12 hours after the noon to which it refers. 
 
 The product Am is the difference between the altitude of the sun 
 at noon and at the time t before or after noon, and must therefore be 
 added to the observed altitude in order to get the corresponding 
 meridian altitude. The altitude of the sun's center is found by com- 
 bining an altitude ol the upper limb with one of the lower limb. The 
 mean of the different results is treated as the maximum altitude was 
 in the approximate field computation. 
 
 LATITUDE FROM OBSERVATIONS OF POLARIS. 
 
 If desired the latitude may be readily determined by observing the 
 altitude of the pole star, when the longitude and local mean time are 
 known approximately, using the formula: 
 
 (j) = h p cos t + ^P 2 sin 2 t sin 1" tan Ji 
 
 i 
 
 t being the hour-angle of the star, p its polar distance, and Ji the ob- 
 served altitude corrected for refraction. The refraction may be 
 obtained from Table I if the tabular quantities are increased by 
 8". 8 cos h, the amount of the solar parallax. When observations are 
 made at upper or lower culmination, the formula becomes 
 
 The right ascension and declination of Polaris for each day of the year 
 are given in the American Ephemeris. There also will be found on the 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN. 45 
 
 last page of the book a table giving the altitude of the star above or 
 below the pole at any hour-angle, computed for latitude 45 and the 
 mean declination of the star for the year. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN AND LOCAL MEAN TIME BY 
 MEANS OF OBSERVATIONS OF THE SUN. 
 
 The following method is the one usually employed to determine 
 the true meridian in connection with the magnetic observations of 
 the Coast and Geodetic Survey. It is more convenient than others 
 in that it may be employed during daylight when the magnetic 
 observations are in progress. In connection with the time signals sent 
 out by telegraph from astronomical observatories it furnishes the 
 means also of determining approximately the longitude of the place of 
 observation. It requires a theodolite with a vertical circle and pris- 
 matic eyepiece for observing the sun, and a well-regulated time- 
 piece. The observations at a place usually consist of four independent 
 sets of observations, two in the morning and two in the afternoon, 
 each set comprising four pointings on the sun and two pointings on a 
 reference mark, symmetrically arranged as in the example given 
 below. For each pointing on the sun the time is noted, and the 
 horizontal and vertical circles are both read. For the best results 
 the observations sliould be made not less than two hours from 
 apparent noon. 
 
 ADJUSTMENT OF THE THEODOLITE. 
 
 Before beginning observations it is necessary to see that the theod- 
 olite is in good adjustment, especially as regards the levels. 
 
 To adjust the levels. After mounting the theodolite on the tripod, 
 set up the instrument over the station mark with the tripod head 
 approximately level and the legs planted firmly in the ground or 
 resting on suitable stubs. Most small theodolites are provided with 
 a quick centering device, by means of which the accurate setting 
 over the station mark is made after the tripod has been fixed in 
 position. Turn the alidade until one of the levels is parallel to the 
 line joining two of the leveling screws. Bring the level bubble to the 
 center of the vial by means of the leveling screws. Bring the bubble 
 of the second level to the center of its vial by means of the third 
 leveling screw (by the other pair of leveling screws, if there are four). 
 If necessary, repeat the operation until both bubbles are in the 
 center. Then turn the alidade 180 in azimuth. If the levels are 
 out of adjustment, the bubbles will no longer be in the center of the 
 vials. Correct one half of the defect by means of the adjusting 
 screws of the levels and the other half by means of the leveling screws. 
 Return the alidade to its original position and repeat the operation 
 if necessary. When the adjustment has been completed the instru- 
 ment will be level and the level bubbles will be in the center of the 
 vials no matter in what direction the telescope is pointing. 
 
46 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 To insert new cross wires. The cross wires of a telescope are at- 
 tached to a metal ring which is held in position near the eyepiece 
 by four capstan screws. They may be spider threads (obtained from 
 a cocoon, not from a web), or fine platinum wire, or, more commonly, 
 lines etched on a thin piece of glass, called a diaphragm, which is 
 fastened to the ring by shellac. An extra diaphragm and a small 
 bottle of shellac should be kept with the instrument so that the 
 observer may insert a new diaphragm should he be so unfortunate as 
 to break the old one. To do this the eyepiece is removed, the ring 
 taken out, and the remains of the old diaphragm and shellac cleaned 
 off. The ring is then laid on a piece of white paper and the new 
 diaphragm placed in the position indicated by lines on the ring and 
 fastened by shellac around the edges. The ring is then put back in 
 the telescope tube, and adjusted in position by means of the capstan 
 screws as explained later. 
 
 To adjust the eyepiece. Point the telescope to the sky and move 
 the eyepiece in or out until the cross wires appear sharp and distinct. 
 Then turn the telescope to a distant object and move the object glass 
 in or out until the object appears sharply defined. If the adjust- 
 ment has been properly made there will be no apparent motion of 
 the object when the eye is moved from one side of the eyepiece to 
 the other. If the vertical cross wire is perpendicular to the hori- 
 zontal axis of the theodolite, an object which has been bisected by 
 one part of the wire will continue to be bisected throughout the 
 length of the wire when the telescope is revolved about its horizontal 
 axis. If this is not the case the capstan screws should be loosened 
 and the ring carrying the cross wires rotated slightly about the 
 optical axis. In the field the verticality of this cross wire may be 
 tested by pointing on the vertical edge of a house. At the same time 
 the horizontality of the transverse axis of the telescope may be tested 
 by turning the telescope in altitude and seeing whether the edge of 
 the house remains bisected for a considerable change in altitude. 
 
 To adjust the vertical cross wire for collimation. Point at a well- 
 defined distant object. Turn the alidade 180 in azimuth and reverse 
 the telescope and point on the object again. The amount by which 
 the difference of the two circle readings differs from 180 is twice the 
 error of collimation and may be corrected by moving laterally the 
 ring carrying the cross wires, by means of the capstan screws on the 
 sides of the telescope tube. When the telescope is mounted eccen- 
 trically, as it is in some magnetometers, allowance must be made for 
 that fact in adjusting for collimation. Two marks must be provided 
 which are twice as far from each other as the optical axis of the tele- 
 scope is from the vertical axis of the instrument. 
 
 This adjustment is usually attended to by the mechanician before 
 the instrument is sent from the office and rarely needs to be repeated 
 in the field unless it becomes necessary to insert new cross wires, since 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN. 47 
 
 the observations are so arranged as to eliminate small errors of col- 
 limation. 
 
 To adjust the vertical circle to redd zero when the telescope is level. 
 While the observations are usually so arranged as to eliminate the 
 effect of index error of the vertical circle and vertical collimation 
 error of the telescope, it is desirable to keep that error small so that 
 a setting on the wrong limb of the sun or an error in reading the 
 circle may be more readily discovered. This adjustment is made by 
 means of a slow-motion screw which operates on an arm of the frame 
 carrying the verniers by which the vertical circle is read. Bisect a 
 distant object with the horizontal cross wire and read the vertical 
 circle. Turn the alidade 180 in azimuth, invert the telescope, and 
 again point on the object and read the vertical circle. If the sum of 
 the two readings differs from 180, correct for half the difference by 
 means of the slow-motion screw which moves the verniers. When 
 this adjustment has been made, the level attached to the vernier 
 frame may be adjusted also. In some theodolites the vertical circle 
 is not attached rigidly to the telescope, but is held by friction or by 
 a clamp. In making the above adjustment for an instrument of 
 that class, a first approximation is obtained by shifting the position 
 of the graduated circle, and then the process is completed by moving 
 the verniers. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Having leveled and adjusted the theodolite and selected a suitable 
 azimuth mark, a well-defined object nearly in the horizon and more 
 than 100 yards distant, the azimuth observations, are made in the 
 following order, as shown in the sample set given below. 
 
 Point on the mark with vertical circle to the right of the telescope 
 (V. C. R.) and read the horizontal circle, verniers A and B. Reverse 
 the circle, invert the telescope and point on the mark again, this 
 time with vertical circle left (V. C. L.). Place the colored glass in 
 position on the eyepiece and point on the sun with vertical circle 
 left, bringing the horizontal and vertical cross wires tangent to the 
 sun's disc. At the moment when both cross wires are tangent note 
 the time by the chronometer. If an appreciable interval is required 
 to look from the eyepiece to the face of the chronometer, the observer 
 should count the half-seconds which elapse and deduct the amount 
 from the actual chronometer reading. The horizontal and vertical 
 circles are then read and recorded. A second pointing on the sun 
 follows, using the same limbs as before. The alidade is then turned 
 180 and the telescope inverted and two more pointings are made, 
 but with the cross wires tangent to the limbs of the sun opposite to 
 those used before reversal. This completes a set of observations. 
 A second set usually follows immediately, but with the order of the 
 pointings reversed, ending up with two pointings on the mark. 
 Between the two sets the instrument should be releveled if necessary. 
 
48 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 To avoid the necessity of moving both tangent screws hi making a 
 setting on the sun, it is convenient to clamp the circles with one 
 cross wire slightly in advance of the limb and then wait until the 
 limb moves up to it, at the same time keeping the other cross wire 
 tangent by means of the tangent screw. As the wires are seen more 
 distinctly when brightly illuminated, the limbs to be observed should 
 be so selected that one wire may cross the sun's disc until the moment 
 of tangency is reached. The observer must be sure to point on 
 opposite limbs in the two halves of a set, so that the mean of the 
 four readings will refer to the sun's center. If he should make the 
 mistake of pointing on the wrong limb, the reading must be corrected 
 for the sun's diameter. For a vertical circle reading the correction 
 is the diameter, which may be obtained from an ephemeris of the 
 sun or with sufficient accuracy from the second column of Table II. 
 For a horizontal circle reading, the sun's diameter must be divided 
 by the cosine of the sun's altitude in order to get the desired cor- 
 rection. The values for altitudes from 10 to 70 are given in 
 Table II. 
 
 Form 266. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS OP SUN FOR AZIMUTH AND TIME. 
 
 Station, Smyrna, Mills, Me. 
 Theodolite of mag'r No. 20. 
 Mark, Flagpole on school bulldinp. 
 Chronometer, 245. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 Temperature, 20 C. 
 
 Sun's 
 limb. 
 
 V. C. 
 
 Chronome- 
 ter time. 
 
 Horizontal circle. Vertical circle. 
 
 A. 
 
 B. Mean. A. 
 
 8. Mean. 
 
 
 L 
 
 Mark 
 
 
 
 
 124 43 40 
 
 43 50 124 43 45 
 
 
 R 
 
 ' 
 
 
 304 43 40 
 
 43 40 304 43 40 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 124 43 42 
 
 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 
 
 
 El 
 
 R 
 
 8 25 54 
 
 155 12 30 
 
 12 50 155 12 40 41 10 30 
 
 11 30 41 11 00 
 
 El 
 
 R 
 
 27 56 155 40 40 
 
 41 00 155 40 50 41 31 00 
 
 31 30 41 31 15 
 
 Q 
 
 L 30 03 337 00 10 
 
 00 20 337 00 15 138 47 00 
 
 45 30 41 13 45 
 
 D 
 
 L 
 
 32 06 
 
 337 28 20 
 
 28 30 
 
 337 28 25 138 27 00 
 
 2.5 30 41 33 45 
 
 
 
 8 28 59.8 
 
 
 
 336 20 32 
 
 41 22 20 
 
 
 
 
 57 
 
 JQ L 8 33 45 337 51 00 
 
 51 20 
 
 337 51 10 138 10 30 09 00 41 50 15 
 
 IQ 
 
 L 35 59 338 24 30 
 
 24 50 
 
 338 24 40 137 48 30 47 00 42 12 15 
 
 ( 
 
 R 38 20 158 10 00 10 20 
 
 158 10 10 43 10 30 11 30 43 11 00 
 
 El 
 
 R 40 37 158 41 50 42 10 
 
 158 42 00 43 31 30 32 30 43 32 00 
 
 
 8 37 10.2 
 
 
 338 17 00 42 41 23 
 
 
 
 
 54 
 
 
 R Mark 304 43 40 43 50 
 
 304 43 45 
 
 
 L 124 43 20 43 40 124 43 30 
 
 
 124 43 38 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN. 
 
 49 
 
 Form 266. 
 
 OBSERVATIONS OP SUN FOR AZIMUTH AND TIME. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 Theodolite of mag'r No. 20. 
 Mark, Flagpole on school building. 
 Chronometer, 245. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 Temperature, 21 C. 
 
 Sun's 
 limb. 
 
 v. c 
 
 Chronome- 
 ter time. 
 
 Horizontal circle. 
 
 Vertical circle. 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 A. 
 
 B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 
 
 
 / // 
 
 / // 
 
 Off/ 
 
 / // 
 
 / // 
 
 in 
 
 
 R 
 
 Mark 
 
 28045 00 
 
 45 20 
 
 280 45 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 
 100 45 20 
 
 45 40 
 
 100 4530 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 280 45 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 ft. m. s. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 d 
 
 L 
 
 3 12 38 
 
 96 35 50 
 
 36 20 
 
 96 36 05 
 
 143 03 00 
 
 00 00 
 
 36 58 30 
 
 El 
 
 L 
 
 14 38 97 01 20 
 
 01 50 
 
 97 01 35 
 
 143 23 00 
 
 2000 
 
 36 38 30 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 16 44 278 04 10 
 
 04 30 
 
 278 04 20 
 
 36 53 30 
 
 53 00 
 
 3653 15 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 18 46 
 
 278 29 00 
 
 2920 
 
 278 29 10 
 
 36 33 00 
 
 32 00 
 
 36 32 30 
 
 
 
 3 15 41. 5 
 
 
 
 277 32 48 
 
 
 
 3645 41 
 
 . 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 08 
 
 .0 
 
 R 
 
 3 20 12 
 
 278 47 20 
 
 47 40 
 
 278 47 30 ! 36 18 00 
 
 1730 
 
 36 1745 
 
 B 
 
 R 
 
 22 12 
 
 279 12 00 
 
 12 20 
 
 279 12 10 i 35 58 00 
 
 57 30 
 
 35 5746 
 
 ^ 
 
 L 
 
 23 50 
 
 98 57 40 
 
 58 10 
 
 98 57 55 
 
 144 56 30 
 
 53 30 
 
 35 05 00 
 
 
 
 L 
 
 25 50 
 
 99 22 40 
 
 23 10 
 
 99 2255 
 
 145 17 00 
 
 1400 
 
 34 4430 
 
 
 
 3 23 01.0 
 
 
 
 279 05 08 
 
 
 
 35 31 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 11 
 
 
 L 
 
 Mark 
 
 100 45 20 
 
 45 40 
 
 100 45 30 
 
 
 
 
 
 R 
 
 
 280 45 20 
 
 45 30 
 
 280 45 25 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 28045 28 
 
 
 
 
 The chronometer and circle readings for the four pointings of a set 
 are combined to get mean values for the subsequent computation. 
 When the vertical circle is graduated from zero to 360 , the readings 
 with vertical circle right give the apparent altitude of one limb of the 
 sun, while those with vertical circle left must be subtracted from 180 
 to get the apparent altitude of the other limb. The mean of the four 
 pointings gives the apparent altitude of the sun's center. This must 
 be corrected for refraction and parallax to get the true altitude. 
 The value of this correction is given in Table I for different tem- 
 peratures and altitudes for average conditions. The change in refrac- 
 tion with change in barometric pressure need not be taken into con- 
 sideration. The correction for refraction is so large and uncertain 
 near the horizon that observations of the sun should be avoided when 
 its altitude is less than 10. 
 
 It is important to test the accuracy of the observations as soon as 
 they have been completed, so that additional sets may be made if 
 
 7721311 4 
 
50 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 necessary. This may be done by comparing the mean of the first and 
 fourth pointings of a set with the mean of the second and third, or by 
 comparing the rate of change in the altitude and azimuth of the sun 
 between the first and second pointings, the third and fourth, fourth 
 and fifth, fifth and sixth, and seventh and eighth. For the period 
 of 15 or 20 minutes required for two sets of observations the rate of 
 motion of the sun does not change much. 
 
 COMPUTATION. 
 
 For the computation of the azimuth of the sun and the local mean 
 time from observations made in the above manner, use is made of the 
 following formulas, the derivation of which has been explained in 
 the first part of this publication. 
 
 ctn 2 %A = sec s sec ( p) sin (s h) sin (s <j>) 
 tan %t = sin (a h) sec (s p) tan 
 
 A = azimuth of sun, east of south in the morning, west of south in 
 the afternoon. 
 
 <j> = latitude of the place. 
 
 h = altitude of the sun corrected for refraction and parallax. 
 
 p = polar distance of the sun at the tune of observation. 
 
 = the hour angle of the sun, or apparent time of observation, 
 expressed in arc. 
 
 The form of computation is shown in the following example, for the 
 sets of observations at Smyrna Mills, Me., given above. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN. 
 
 51 
 
 Form 269. 
 
 COMPUTATION OF AZIMUTH AND LONGITUDE. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Aug. 5. 
 
 Aug. 5. 
 
 Aug. 5. 
 
 Aug. 5. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h 
 
 41 21 29 
 
 42 40 29 
 
 36 44 33 
 
 35 30 04 
 
 * 
 
 46 08 21 
 
 46 08 21 
 
 46 08 21 
 
 46 08 21 
 
 P 
 
 72 51 34 
 
 72 51 39 
 
 72 56 08 
 
 72 56 12 
 
 2s 
 
 160 21 24 
 
 161 40 29 
 
 155 49 02 
 
 154 34 37 
 
 s 
 
 80 10 42 
 
 80 50 14 
 
 77 54 31 
 
 77 17 18 
 
 s-p 
 
 7 19 08 
 
 7 58 35 
 
 4 58 23 
 
 4 21 06 
 
 s-h 
 
 38 49 13 
 
 38 09 45 
 
 41 09 58 
 
 41 47 14 
 
 s-t 
 
 34 02 21 
 
 34 41 53 
 
 31 46 10 
 
 31 08 57 
 
 log sec * 
 
 0. 76807 
 
 0. 79795 
 
 0. 67887 
 
 0. 65749 
 
 " sec (sp) 
 
 0.00355 
 
 0.00422 
 
 0.00164 
 
 0.00125 
 
 11 sin (s-h) 
 
 9. 79718 
 
 9. 79091 
 
 9.81839 
 
 9.82371 
 
 " sin (-tf) 
 
 9.74800 
 
 9.75530 
 
 9. 72140 
 
 9.71372 
 
 " ctnM 
 
 0.31680 
 
 0.34838 
 
 0.22030 
 
 0. 19617 
 
 " ctnM 
 
 0.15840 
 
 0. 17419 
 
 0. 11015 
 
 0.09808 
 
 A from South 
 
 69 33 04 
 
 67 36 43 
 
 75 37 17 
 
 77 10 09 
 
 Circle reads 
 
 336 20 32 
 
 338 17 00 
 
 277 32 48 
 
 279 05 08 
 
 S. Mer. " 
 
 45 53 36 
 
 45 53 43 
 
 201 55 31 
 
 201 54 59 
 
 Mark " 
 
 124 43 42 
 
 124 43 38 
 
 280 45 20 
 
 280 45 28 
 
 Azimuth of Mark 
 
 78 50 06 
 
 78 49 55 
 
 78 49 49 
 
 78 50 29 
 
 Mean 
 
 78 50 05 
 
 
 
 
 log sec (sp) sin (s h) 
 
 9.80073 
 
 9. 79513 
 
 9.82003 
 
 9.82496 
 
 " tan \ t 
 
 9. 64233 
 
 9. 62094 
 
 9.70988 
 
 9.72688 
 
 t in arc 
 
 47 23 24 
 
 45 20 52 
 
 54 17 25 
 
 56 07 55 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 ft. TO. S. 
 
 ft. TO. *. 
 
 t 
 
 -3 09 33.6 
 
 -3 01 23.5 
 
 3 37 09.7 
 
 3 44 31.7 
 
 E 
 
 + 5 53.4 
 
 + 5 53.3 
 
 + 5 51.8 
 
 + 5 51.8 
 
 Local M. T. 
 
 8 56 19.8 
 
 9 04 29.8 
 
 3 43 01.5 
 
 3 50 23.5 
 
 Chron. time 
 
 8 28 59.8 
 
 8 37 10. 2 
 
 3 15 41.5 
 
 3 23 01.0 
 
 A t on L. M. T. 
 
 + 27 20.0 
 
 + 27 19.6 
 
 + 27 20.0 
 
 + 27 22.5 
 
 J t on 75 M. T. 
 
 5.8 
 
 5.8 
 
 5.8 
 
 5.8 
 
 41 
 
 -27 25.8 
 
 -27 25.4 
 
 -27 25.8 
 
 27 28.3 
 
 Mean 
 
 -27 26.3= 
 
 - 6 51'.6 
 
 A=68 
 
 08'.4 
 
 The different steps of the computation are most conveniently made 
 in the following order: 
 
 Enter the corrected altitude, mean readings of the horizontal circle 
 for the pointings on the sun and on the mark, and the chronometer 
 time for each set of observations in their proper places. Enter the 
 value of latitude obtained from the latitude observations or other 
 source. Compute the chronometer correction on standard time for 
 the time of each set of observations from the comparisons with 
 
52 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 telegraphic time signals. Unless the chronometer has a large rate 
 its correction may be taken the same for two contiguous sets of 
 observations. Compute the Greenwich mean time of observation for 
 each set, and find from the American Ephemeris, or H. O. Publication 
 No. 118, the sun's polar distance and the equation of time for that 
 time in the manner explained in connection with the computation of 
 latitude from circum-meridian altitudes. The succeeding steps 
 require little explanation. As the horizontal circles of theodolites 
 are with few exceptions graduated clockwise, and as the sun is east 
 of south in the morning and west of south in the afternoon, it follows 
 that in order to find the horizontal circle reading of the south point, 
 the azimuth of the sun must be added to the circle reading of the sun 
 for the morning observations and subtracted from it for the after- 
 noon observations. The horizontal circle reading of the south point 
 subtracted from the mark reading gives the azimuth of the mark, 
 counted from south around by west from to 360. 
 
 For the computation of t, the logarithms of sec (s p) and sin (s h) 
 are found in the azimuth computation and their sum can be written 
 down in its proper place. From that must be subtracted log ctn A 
 to find log tan %t. The corresponding value of t is the time before or 
 after apparent noon. If in the case of the morning observations 
 ctn i^ be substituted for tan ty, ^ will be counted from midnight. 
 The difference between the chronometer correction on local mean 
 time and the correction on standard time is the difference in longi- 
 tude between the standard meridian and the place of observation. 
 
 The angular measures connecting selected prominent objects are 
 conveniently made in connection with the mark readings at the 
 close of the azimuth observations. The various marks should be 
 pointed on successively with vertical circle left and then in the 
 reverse order with vertical circle right. They should be well-defined 
 objects not liable to be confused with similar ones near by. The edge 
 of a chimney, for example, is not a desirable mark, as there is always 
 danger of confusing the edges as they appear to the naked eye with 
 their reversed position as seen through the telescope. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE TRUE MERIDIAN FROM OBSERVATIONS OF 
 
 POLARIS. 
 
 The true meridian may also be determined by measuring the angle 
 between Polaris and a reference mark, when the local mean time is 
 known. The most convenient time for observing is just after sunset, 
 when the mark does not require illumination. The azimuth of the 
 star from the north is computed by means of the formula 
 
 sin t 
 tan A = 
 
 cos $ tan d sin cf> cos t 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 53 
 
 in which t is the hour angle of the star before or after upper culmina- 
 tion and d is its declination. For the purposes of magnetic work it is 
 sufficient to know the local mean time within one or two minutes. 
 At elongation the change in the azimuth of Polaris is inappreciable 
 for a considerable interval and even a less accurate knowledge of the 
 time will suffice. When the local time is not known the time of 
 culmination of Polaris may be determined with sufficient accuracy 
 from a knowledge of its position with relation to Ursse Majoris or 
 8 Cassiopeia. 
 
 A detailed explanation of these methods of determining the true 
 meridian, together with tables to facilitate their use, will be found in 
 " Principal Facts of the Earth's Magnetism," pages 79-91. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 A. WITH A MAGNETOMETER. 
 
 The determination of the magnetic declination consists of two 
 operations ; first, the determination of the true meridian as explained 
 in the preceding section, and second the determination of the mag- 
 netic meridian, using either a magnetometer, a compass declinometer, 
 or the compass attachment of a dip circle. 
 
 Coast and Geodetic Survey pattern magnetometer. Most of the mag- 
 netometers in use in the field work of the Coast and Geodetic Survey 
 are similar in design to the one shown in Figure 3. It is usually re- 
 ferred to as a theodolite magnetometer since it comprises a theodolite 
 and a magnetometer arranged for mounting on the same base. It is 
 light, compact, of simple construction, and easily handled and is 
 therefore especially suited to the field work of a magnetic survey. 
 The horizontal circle is 5 inches in diameter graduated to 20' and 
 read by two verniers to 20". The magnets are hollow, octagonal, 
 1.1 cm. between opposite faces. The lengths of the two magnets 
 (7.4 and 6.0 cm.) are such as to make the first distribution coefficient 
 (P) nearly zero. The observer faces south when making observa- 
 tions of the suspended magnet. In the south end of each magnet is 
 a graduated scale and in the north end a collimating lens so arranged 
 that when the reading telescope is focused on a distant object the 
 graduated scale will be in focus also. The magnet is supported in a 
 brass stirrup consisting of three parallel connected rings joined to a 
 shank about 2.5 cm. long. This long shank presents any appreciable 
 change of level of the magnet for a considerable change of vertical 
 force. A short pin in the center of the stirrup engages a groove about 
 the center of the magnet. With the octagonal form of magnet the 
 scale is easily placed horizontal in either the erect or inverted posi- 
 tions. When not in use the stirrup is attached to a hook under the 
 roof of the magnet house to prevent breaking or twisting of the fiber. 
 
54 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Silk fiber suspension is used, two strands usually being sufficient to 
 support the magnets without danger of breaking. The upper ends 
 of the fibers are held by a clamp, with a suitable arrangement of screw 
 and nut or rack and pinion for regulating the height of the suspended 
 magnet. 
 
 FIG. 3. Coast and Geodetic Survey pattern magnetometer. 
 
 The end of the reading telescope is connected with one end of the 
 wooden magnet house by a hood of dark cloth, so that no glass comes 
 between the objective and the magnet. Light to illuminate the scale 
 of the magnet is admitted through a hole in the other end of the 
 magnet house. This hole is closed by a glass window, which is 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 55 
 
 opened when pointings are to be made on the mark in declination 
 observations, in order to avoid the distortion likely to be caused by 
 irregular refraction of the glass. 
 
 The deflection bars used in the horizontal intensity observations 
 are of such shape that the deflecting magnet when in position on the 
 bar is on a level with the optical axis of the reading telescope and at 
 right angles with it and consequently with the suspended magnet 
 also. The bars are not graduated, but on each there are two troughs 
 for supporting the deflecting magnet. In the middle of each trough 
 is a short pin which fits into the groove around the magnet and thus 
 insures its proper setting. The pins are approximately 30 and 40 cm. 
 from the center of the magnet house. In Figure 3 the long magnet 
 is in position on the deflection bar, and the wooden sides of the magnet 
 house have been removed to show the suspended short magnet. 
 The theodolite shown at the right of the picture is easily mounted in 
 place of the magnetometer when azimuth or latitude observations 
 are to be made. 
 
 In order to minimize the change in torsion with change in atmos- 
 pheric conditions, the silk fibers should be well soaked in glycerin 
 before they are used. Extra fibers should be kept in soak in a bottle 
 of glycerin, to be ready for use in case of breakage. A convenient 
 way to insert new fibers is as follows: Draw the fibers through the 
 fingers several times to remove superfluous glycerin and undesirable 
 twists. Fasten one end to the eye of the stirrup with a small loop. 
 Draw the fibers even and fasten a small piece of wax or other weight 
 to the loose ends. Eemove the torsion head from the suspension 
 tube, turn the magnet house upside down, and drop the weighted ends 
 through the tube. The wax may then be removed and the ends 
 fastened to the torsion head at the proper distance from the stirrup, 
 care being taken to have the two fibers of the same length. When 
 the torsion head is at its lowest position the stirrup should be about 
 half an inch above the floor of the magnet house. Especial care must 
 be taken to leave no loose ends which might touch the magnet house 
 or the inside of the suspension tube. 
 
 The determination of the magnetic meridian with this type of 
 magnetometer is made as follows: Mount the magnetometer and 
 level carefully by means of the striding level provided for the reading 
 telescope (shown in position in the picture). Turn the alidade until 
 the telescope points approximately magnetic south. Place the 
 thermometer in the hole in the roof of the magnet house, suspend the 
 torsion weight (a solid brass cylinder of about the same mass as the 
 long magnet), and replace the wooden sides of the magnet house by 
 those of glass. Bring the torsion weight to rest and then watch its 
 vibration under the influence of the twist of the suspension fibers. 
 By successive trials turn the torsion head at the top of the suspension 
 
56 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 tube until the weight comes to rest in a -position parallel to the optical 
 axis of the telescope, or until its arc of vibration, reduced to a small 
 amount, is bisected by that line. The suspension is then free from 
 twist that is, there is no tendency to turn a suspended weight out of 
 the vertical plane through the optical axis of the telescope and the 
 reading of the torsion head indicates the line of detorsion. With a 
 silk fiber suspension just strong enough to support the magnet, the 
 effect of 90 of torsion seldom amounts to as much as 5' and an error 
 of 10 in the determination of the line of detorsion would therefore 
 affect the resulting decimation by not more than 0'.5. 
 
 Open the glass window in the end of the magnet house and point 
 upon the object used as a reference mark in the azimuth observa- 
 tions, lowering the torsion weight below the line of sight. Read both 
 verniers and enter the readings in the proper place in the record. 
 
 Close the window, turn the alidade until the telescope again points 
 approximately magnetic south, remove the torsion weight and sus- 
 pend in its place the long magnet with its scale erect, being careful 
 to slacken the fibers as little as possible. Raise the magnet to the 
 level of the reading telescope, quiet its vibration as much as possible, 
 and replace the wooden sides of the magnet house. Adjust the 
 mirror so that it reflects the light onto the scale of the magnet. 
 
 Check the vibration of the magnet until the arc is reduced to one 
 or two divisions of the scale. This may be done by means of a screw- 
 driver, adjusting pin, or other small piece of steel, holding it a short 
 distance from the end of the magnet, first on one side and then on 
 the other as the magnet swings back and forth. It will often be 
 found that an adjusting pin has become slightly magnetized. In 
 such cases the alternate attraction and repulsion may be produced 
 by turning the pin end for end. 
 
 Turn the alidade until the division of the scale corresponding to the 
 magnetic axis swings by about equal amounts to the right and left 
 of the vertical wire of the reading telescope, and clamp the hori- 
 zontal circle. If the scale reading of the axis is not known approxi- 
 mately from previous observation, the middle division of the scale 
 will be used. This setting of the horizontal circle is not to be changed 
 until the time comes to point on the mark again. 
 
 Read the scale when the magnet comes to rest momentarily at the 
 extremes of its swing. When the scale is not numbered it is assumed 
 to be erect when the longer divisions project upward and the readings 
 are then considered as increasing from left to right. The "left" 
 reading is the one when the left end of the scale approaches nearest 
 to the vertical wire of the reading telescope, and is therefore less 
 than the "right" reading for magnet erect. After an interval of a 
 minute read the scale again. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 57 
 
 Turn the magnet upside down in the stirrup, so that the scale ap- 
 pears inverted, reduce the arc of vibration, and make four readings 
 of the scale at intervals of one minute. The zero of the scale is now 
 to the right, and the "left" reading will be greater than the " right. " 
 
 Return the magnet to the erect position and make two more 
 scale readings. 
 
 Read the horizontal circle to be sure that it has not been disturbed 
 accidently; remove the magnet and complete the set by pointing on 
 the reference mark. When horizontal intensity observations are 
 to follow immediately, as is usually the case, it is more convenient 
 to make the first set of oscillations before removing the magnet and 
 repeating the pointing on the mark. 
 
 The mean of the erect and inverted readings gives the division of 
 the scale which corresponds to the position of the magnetic axis. 
 When the telescope is pointed on that division, it is in the plane of the 
 magnetic meridian. For any other scale reading the reading of the 
 horizontal circle must be corrected by the angular value of the 
 portion of the scale included between the observed scale reading and 
 the scale reading of the axis. With magnet erect the zero of the 
 graduation is at the apparent left and increasing scale readings 
 correspond to decreasing circle readings. Under ordinary conditions 
 the scale reading of the axis of a magnet will remain very nearly 
 constant for a long time. If it shows much variation from station 
 to station, the magnet should be examined carefully to make sure 
 that the scale glass and its mounting are not loose. 
 
 The angular value of one division of the scale is readily determined 
 by pointing successively on every fifth or every tenth division and 
 reading the horizontal circle in eac*h case, then repeating the opera- 
 tions in the reverse order, so as to eliminate gradual change of 
 declination during the observations, as shown in the following 
 example, the order of observations being indicated by the figures in 
 the second and fourth column: 
 
 SCALE VALUE OF MAGNET 11L OP MAGNETOMETER No. 11. 
 
 Scale 
 reading. 
 
 
 First set. 
 
 1 
 
 Second set. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 Value of 30 
 divisions. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 146 46 45 
 
 12 
 
 146 46 15 
 
 146 46 30 
 
 (0-30) 
 
 10 
 
 2 
 
 146 11 15 
 
 11 
 
 146 10 30 
 
 146 10 52 
 
 (10-40) 
 
 20 
 
 3 
 
 145 33 30 
 
 10 
 
 145 32 30 
 
 145 33 00 
 
 (20-50) 
 
 30 
 
 4 
 
 144 57 45 
 
 9 
 
 144 57 15 
 
 144 57 30 
 
 1 49 00 
 
 40 
 
 5 
 
 144 20 45 
 
 8 
 
 144 20 00 
 
 144 20 22 
 
 1 50 30 
 
 50 
 
 6 
 
 143 42 30 
 
 7 
 
 143 42 30 
 
 143 42 30 
 
 1 50 30 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 30 divisions 
 
 1 5000 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 division 
 
 3'.67 
 
58 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 The accompanying example showing the form of record and com- 
 putation needs little explanation. 
 
 Form 37. 
 
 MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 Magnetometer No. 20. 
 Mark, Flagpole on school building. 
 Magnet, 20L. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 
 Line of detorsion, 80. 
 
 Chron. 
 time. 
 
 Scale. 
 
 Scale readings. 
 
 Horizontal circle readings. 
 
 Left. 
 
 Right. Mean. 
 
 
 Mark. 
 
 Magnet. 
 
 A.m. 
 923 
 
 9 24 
 926 
 9 27 
 9 28 
 9 29 
 9 31 
 9 32 
 
 E 
 E 
 I 
 I 
 I 
 I 
 E 
 E 
 
 d. 
 
 28.8 
 28.9 
 28.7 
 28.7 
 28.7 
 28.8 
 28.5 
 28.5 
 
 d. d. 
 30.2 29.50 
 30.3 29.60 
 25. 6 27. 15 
 25.7 27.20 
 25.8 27.25 
 25.8 27.30 
 30. 9 29. 70 
 30. 9 29. 70 
 
 i 
 
 Before A 
 B 
 After j A 
 B 
 
 1 II 
 
 32538 40 
 145 3900 
 325 38 40 
 145 39 00 
 
 / It 
 
 226 46 20 
 46 46 40 
 226 4620 
 46 46 40 
 
 Mean 
 
 325 38 50 
 
 226 4630 
 
 Mean scale readings. d. 
 Erect 29.62 
 Inverted 27.22 
 
 Axis 28.42 
 
 Mean scale reading, erect 
 Axis 
 
 Scale Axis 
 
 Reduction to axis 
 Circle reading 
 
 d. 
 29.62 
 28.42 
 
 Remarks: 
 Temp.: 27.OC. 
 Weather: Fair. 
 Torsion weight suspended 25 
 minutes. 
 1 division of scale=2'.0. 
 
 h. m. 
 Mean chron. time 9 27. 5 
 Chron. corr'n on L. M. T. +27. 3 
 
 +1.20 
 
 226 46.5 
 
 Mag'c S. M. reading 
 Mark reading 
 
 226 48.9 
 325 38.8 
 
 Magnetic azimuth of mark 
 True azimuth of mark * 
 
 98 49.9 
 78 50.1 
 
 Magnetic declination, W 
 Diurnal variation 
 
 19 59.8 
 +5.5 
 
 Mean declination, W 
 
 20 05.3 
 
 Local mean time 
 
 9 55 
 
 * Counted from south around by west from to 360. 
 
 The azimuth of the mark and the chronometer correction on local 
 mean time were obtained from the computation of the observations 
 of the sun, reproduced on page 51. The magnetic south meridian 
 reading subtracted from the mark reading gives the magnetic azimuth 
 of the mark, and that subtracted from the true azimuth of the mark 
 gives the magnetic declination, east when plus and west when minus. 
 The correction for diurnal variation is supplied in the Office from the 
 records of the nearest magnetic observatory, but its approximate 
 value may be obtained (except for periods of magnetic storms) from 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 59 
 
 Table IX, which gives the average diurnal variation for different sea- 
 sons of the year for the different observatories. 
 
 India Magnetic Survey pattern magnetometer. Magnetometers of 
 the type shown in Figure 4 are in use at three of the magnetic observa- 
 tories of the Coast and Geodetic Survey. They are very well adapted 
 
 FIG. 4. India Magnetic Survey pattern magnetometer. 
 
 for that purpose, but are rather too heavy for field work, although one 
 of them has been so used for several years. This type of instrument 
 was designed by Capt. H. A. Denholm Fraser, R. E., for use in the 
 magnetic survey of India, and is a modification of the well-known 
 Kew pattern. The long ma^giietJs^hollow cylinder about 9 cm. long 
 
 or THE 
 UNIVERSITY 
 
60 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 and 1 cm. in diameter, with an aluminum cell mounted externally at 
 each end. The cell at the south end carries a piece of optical glass on 
 which are engraved two lines at right angles to each other. The cell 
 at the north end contains a collimating lens. On the glass diaphragm 
 of the reading telescope there are two scales, one vertical and the other 
 horizontal. Around the middle of the magnet is a shallow groove, 
 which is engaged by a screw pin on the under side of the stirrup. The 
 stirrup has another sheath above the one holding the magnet, in which 
 is placed an inertia bar of the same dimensions as the magnet when 
 observations are made to determine the moment of inertia of the 
 magnet and suspension. The magnet is not removed from the stirrup 
 except when repairs are necessary. Four longitudinal lines on the 
 magnet and a mark on the stirrup insure the horizontality of one of 
 the cross lines on the glass in the s,outh cell. 
 
 The short magnet is similar to w the long magnet, reduced in all 
 dimensions, but without the end cells. It is mounted in a stirrup 
 above and parallel to an aluminum collimator similar to the long 
 magnet. The magnets are suspended by phosphor-bronze ribbons 
 having about the same coefficient of torsion as a silk-fiber suspension. 
 The torsion weight is a xylonite disk mounted on a metal spindle. It 
 is divided on the periphery to degrees and is figured at every fifth 
 division. By the insertion of a small lens in front of the objective of 
 the reading telescope, the suspended weight may be read without 
 change of focus. The plane of detorsion is indicated by the zero of 
 the graduation. 
 
 The straight brass deflection bar is not graduated, but has a series 
 of holes bored in its upper surface at distances 22.5, 26.25, 30, 35, and 
 40 cm. on either side of the center. During deflection observations 
 the long magnet is placed in a small wooden box, on the under side 
 of which is a metal plug fitting snugly the holes in the deflection bar. 
 The box is so constructed that the center of the magnet is exactly over 
 the center of this plug and on a level with the suspended short magnet. 
 This arrangement eliminates all direct handling of the long magnet 
 during deflection observations. 
 
 Declination observations with this type of magnetometer differ only 
 in detail from those given in the example. The scale is on the glass 
 diaphragm of the reading telescope and the reduction to axis is 
 obtained by subtracting the mean of the scale readings (magnet erect 
 and magnet inverted) from 50, the middle division. The difference 
 between the erect and inverted readings is twice the angle between the 
 geometric and magnetic axes of the magnet and should remain very 
 nearly constant. 
 
 The angular value of one division of the scale may be obtained by 
 pointings on a distant object instead of on the magnet. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 61 
 
 Magnetometers of other design are so seldom used in the field work 
 of the Survey that it is unnecessary to describe them in detail. Men- 
 tion may be made of No. 21, a very small instrument weighing only 
 4 kg., similar to the one used in the magnetic survey of France and 
 described by Mascart on page 212 of his "Traite* de Magne'tisme Ter- 
 restre," and No. 25, a combination instrument of the Prussian field 
 magnetometer type, consisting of theodolite, magnetometer, decli- 
 nometer, and dip circle, all arranged for mounting v on the same base. 
 A description of this instrument will be found in " Results of Obser- 
 vations made at the Coast and Geodetic Survey Magnetic Observatory 
 at Sitka, Alaska, 1902-1904." 
 
 DECLINATION FROM HORIZONTAL INTENSITY OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 In the directions for determining horizontal intensity, given later 
 on, it will be seen that provision is made for reading the scale of the 
 magnet and the horizontal circle in connection with the observations 
 of oscillations. This furnishes a check on the regular declination 
 observations which immediately precede or foUow, since the change 
 in scale reading should correspond with the change in circle reading; 
 or a value of the declination may be computed by assuming that the 
 mark reading and the scale reading of the axis are the same as during 
 the regular declination set. In the example given it was not necessary 
 to shift the setting of the horizontal circle between declination and 
 oscillation observations, since the axis reading was very near the 
 middle division (30). 
 
 A value of declination may also be obtained from the two sets of 
 deflections, provided the short magnet is erect in one set and inverted 
 in the other, and provided also that the position of the instrument is 
 not disturbed between a set of deflections and one of the declination 
 sets, so that the mark reading may be assumed to be unchanged. The 
 observations are so arranged that the horizontal circle is read when 
 the magnet is deflected by approximately equal amounts in opposite 
 directions from the magnetic meridian, and the mean of the readings 
 therefore represents the reading of the magnetic south meridian, 
 which combined with the mark reading gives the magnetic azimuth of 
 the mark. In the sample set of deflections on page 78: 
 
 Mean of 1, 4, 5, 8 226 29 36 
 
 2, 3, 6, 7 226 29 15 
 
 Magnetic south meridian reading 226 29 26 
 
 Mark reading, from declination above 325 38 50 
 
 Magnetic azimuth of mark 99 09 24 
 
62 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 From the second set which followed with magnet inverted : 
 
 O / /' 
 
 Mean of 1, 4, 5, 8 295 32 26 
 
 2, 3, 6, 7 . 295 32 25 
 
 Magnetic south meridian reading 295 32 26 
 
 Mark reading, from second declination set 34 08 20 
 
 Magnetic azimuth of mark 98 35 54 
 
 Mean of two sets 98 52 39 
 
 True azimuth of mark ' 78 50 05 
 
 Magnetic declination, W 20 02 34 
 
 Diurnal variation -f- 2 00 
 
 Mean decimation, W 20 04 34 
 
 In this case the horizontal circle was shifted by means of the lower 
 clamp between the two sets of deflections. The difference between 
 the two values of the magnetic azimuth of the mark represents 
 approximately twice the angular distance between the magnetic axis 
 of the short magnet and the middle division of its scale. 
 
 B. WITH A COMPASS DECLINOMETER. 
 
 Two types of compass declinometer are in use in the Coast and 
 Geodetic Survey. The older form is essentially an improved pris- 
 matic compass with slit and thread arrangement for pointing on the 
 object selected as a mark. It consists of a cylindrical brass bowl 
 resting on three foot screws, in the center of which is the pivot on 
 which the needle rests. The needle is a flat (in the vertical plane) 
 rectangular bar 9 cm. long, terminating in steel points. It is ex- 
 panded at the center to inclose an agate cup which may be inserted 
 from either side, thus making it possible to invert the needle. The 
 change in balance of the needle with change in vertical intensity is 
 corrected by means of a small weight which may be slid along the 
 needle. The portion of the instrument which carries the alidade 
 forms the cover of the bowl and may be taken off and reversed. The 
 horizontal circle has a limb 12 cm. in diameter divided to 10' and 
 read by estimation to whole minutes. The instrument is provided 
 with a circular level. 
 
 The compass declinometer is intended especially for use by tri- 
 angulation parties, where the azimuth is known and time is not 
 available for more extended magnetic observations. As the slit and 
 thread arrangement can not be used for sighting on a very distant 
 object, it is usual either to place a temporary reference mark on line 
 from the triangulation station to a distant object by means of a 
 theodolite or else to set up the compass declinometer accurately in 
 line and use the triangulation station itself as the reference mark. 
 
 In a perfect instrument the point of support of the needle should 
 be in the vertical of the center of graduation, and the three objects 
 the slit at the prism, the point of support, and the sight wire should 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 63 
 
 be in the same vertical plane. When this is not the case, the instru- 
 ment will have an index correction, constant so long as the adjust- 
 ment of the instrument remains unchanged, which must be deter- 
 mined at the beginning and end of a season's work at some place 
 where the declination is known. Changing the position of the prism, 
 i. e., moving it up or down on its support, if the latter be not truly 
 vertical, will change the index correction. When making the ob- 
 servations to determine the index correction, therefore, the observer 
 should mark the position of the prism and in subsequent observa- 
 tions should be sure that it is in the same position. 
 
 Form 38. 
 
 MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 Station, Cheltenham, Md. 
 Compass Declinometer No. 741. 
 Mark, Hill's barn cupola. 
 
 Date, Monday, February 28, 19 10. 
 Observer, J. E. Burbank. 
 
 Chron. 
 time, 
 a. m. 
 
 Mark. 
 
 Circle direct. 
 Needle direct. 
 
 Circle reversed. 
 Needle inverted. 
 
 Mark. 
 
 North end. 
 
 South end. 
 
 South end. 
 
 North end. 
 
 A. TO. 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 , 
 
 f 
 
 / 
 
 , 
 
 11 24 
 
 257 08 
 
 183 05 
 
 2 54 
 
 182 54 
 
 2 57 
 
 257 09 
 
 
 77 06 
 
 3 04 
 
 182 54 
 
 2 53 
 
 182 57 
 
 7706 
 
 
 257 10 
 
 182 54 
 
 2 57 
 
 183 02 
 
 2 59 
 
 257 06 
 
 11 40 
 
 7708 
 
 2 53 
 
 18256 
 
 3 00 
 
 18257 
 
 77 04 
 
 Means 
 
 257 08. 
 
 182 59.0 
 
 182 55. 2 
 
 182 57. 2 
 
 182 57. 5 
 
 257 06.2 
 
 p. m. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 h. TO. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 16 13 
 
 17 06 
 
 302 50 
 
 122 49 
 
 122 40 
 
 302 38 
 
 17 03 
 
 
 197 04 
 
 122 50 
 
 302 48 
 
 30238 
 
 12237 
 
 197 02 
 
 
 17 04 
 
 302 48 
 
 122 49 
 
 122 48 
 
 302 35 
 
 17 04 
 
 16 28 
 
 197 02 
 
 122 49 
 
 302 48 
 
 302 44 
 
 122 34 
 
 197 02 
 
 Means 
 
 17 04.0 
 
 302 49. 2 
 
 302 48.5 
 
 302 42.5 
 
 302 36.0 
 
 17 02.8 
 
 Chron. correction on star 
 Difference of longitude, ; 
 
 Chron. correction on loca 
 
 idard 75th m 
 50' 
 
 h. m. 
 er. time* .. 2 25 
 
 7 
 
 1 mean time 
 
 n 
 
 
 2 32 
 
 
 Local mean time. 
 
 h. m. 
 9 00 
 
 ft. TO. 
 
 13 48 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 1 
 
 Mark reading 
 
 257 07. 1 
 
 1703.4 
 
 -.-, ,-.-;. 
 
 Needle reading 
 
 182 57. 2 
 
 302 44. 1 
 
 
 Magnetic azimuth of mark 
 
 74 09.9 
 
 74 19.3 
 
 
 True azimuth of mark f 
 
 68 51.3 
 
 68 51.3 
 
 .. . 
 
 Magnetic declination, W 
 
 5 18.6 
 
 5 28.0 
 
 
 Index correction 
 
 +14.4 
 
 +14.4 i 
 
 Diurnal var. correction 
 
 + 2.0 
 
 - 5.0 
 
 Resulting declination, W 
 
 5 35.0 
 
 5 37.4 
 
 
 * Plus when slow, minus when fast. 
 
 t Counted from south around by west. 
 
64 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 After leveling the instrument and adjusting the position of the 
 prism, the vertically of the sight wire should be tested by means of 
 a plumb line or the vertical edge of a building. The mark selected 
 should be nearly in the horizon, so that the error due to lack of ver- 
 ticality of the wire may be as small as possible. 
 
 Place the needle on the lifter, close the box, and lower the needle 
 gently onto the pivot. Adjust the balance if necessary by means of 
 the sliding weight. The order of observations will then be as follows, 
 both indices being read in each case: (1) Two pointings on the mark; 
 (2) one pointing on the north end of the needle; (3) one pointing on 
 the south end of the needle; (4) one pointing on the south end of the 
 needle; (5) one pointing on the north end of the needle; (6) invert 
 the needle and reverse the upper part of the instrument; (7) one 
 pointing on the south end of the needle; (8) one pointing on the 
 north end of the needle; (9) one pointing on the north end of the 
 needle; (10) one pointing on the south end of the needle; (11) two 
 pointings on the mark. The needle should be disturbed slightly 
 between readings (3) and (4) and (8) and (9) by means of a piece of 
 steel (screw driver or knife). 
 
 Record the times of beginning and ending of the pointings on the 
 needle and give the correction of the timepiece on standard tune. 
 It is preferable to make observations both morning and afternoon at 
 about the tunes when the easterly and westerly extremes of declina- 
 tion ordinarily occur or late in the afternoon when the reduction to 
 mean of day is usually small. (See Table IX.) If time permits, 
 three sets of observations should be made, shifting the position of 
 the foot screws on the tripod between sets. 
 
 While in theory the above type of compass declinometer has many 
 points to commend it, in practice it has not proved entirely satis- 
 factory. In two cases the index correction has been found to be 
 different for different positions of the needle with respect to the bowl, 
 indicating the presence of magnetic impurities in the metal of which 
 the bowls are constructed, although special tests have failed to detect 
 the seat of the trouble. 
 
 In supplying the demand for additional compass declinometers, the 
 satisfactory results which have been obtained in determining the 
 declination with compass attachments fitted to dip circles have led 
 to the construction of a new type of instrument from designs prepared 
 by Mr. E. G. Fischer, Chief of the Instrument Division. It is nothing 
 more than a compass needle with peep sights mounted on a graduated 
 horizontal circle, but some of the details are novel and all have been 
 worked out with great care. The base rests on three leveling screws, 
 has double centers, and the horizontal circle is read by two verniers. 
 This base supports a rectangular box, in which is mounted a compass 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 65 
 
 needle about 6 inches long. At each end of the needle is a graduated 
 arc, about 20 in extent, with the zero in the middle. Vertical peep 
 sights are attached to the ends of the box, so that the zeros of the 
 graduations and the point of support of the needle are in the vertical 
 plane through the peep sights. The lifter of the needle is of special 
 design, so arranged that the instrument can not be packed for ship- 
 ment without first lifting the needle off the pivot. Observations with 
 this type of instrument differ but little from those described in detail 
 for the older form of declinometer. 
 
 The instrument should be set low enough to permit the observer to 
 look directly down upon the needle when making the settings. After 
 the instrument has been leveled and the sliding weight adjusted in 
 position if necessary, the order of observations is as follows: (1) Two 
 pointings on the mark, one direct and one reversed; (2) one reading, 
 north end of needle set at zero; one reading, south end set at zero; 
 one reading, south end set at zero; one reading, north end set at zero. 
 In a similar manner (3) four readings with north end set 5 east of 
 zero or south end 5 west of zero; (4) four readings with north end 5 
 west of zero or south end 5 east of zero; (5) four readings with the 
 ends set at zero; (6) two pointings on the mark. Record must be 
 made of the time of beginning and ending. It will be sufficient to 
 read one vernier for settings on one end of the needle and the other 
 vernier for settings on the other end. The needle should be lifted 
 when pointing on the mark. The eye should be moved up and down 
 the slit to insure accuracy of pointing. 
 
 Observations with the compass attachment of a dip circle (shown 
 in Fig. 5) are made in the same manner and the method of computa- 
 tion is in each case the same as for the older form of declinometer. A 
 sample set of observations is given below. 
 
 Form 38a. 
 
 MAGNETIC DECLINATION. 
 
 Station, Sweetwater, Tex. 
 Compass of dip circle No. 30. 
 Mark, Cupola of schoolhouse. 
 
 Date, January 17, 1910. 
 Observer, W. H. Burger. 
 
 Chron. time. 
 
 Mark, 
 circle 
 direct. 
 
 Needle set at 0. 
 set at 0. 
 
 Needle set 5 right, 
 set 5 left. 
 
 Mark, 
 circle 
 reversed. 
 
 North end. 
 
 South end. 
 
 North end. 
 
 South end. 
 
 h. m. 
 1032 
 
 13 05 
 
 21 24 
 
 21 25 
 
 16 27 
 
 16 25 
 
 13 01 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 23 
 
 26 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 
 23 
 
 26 
 
 26 19 
 
 26 18 
 
 
 10 40 
 
 13 05 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 20 
 
 18 
 
 13 04 
 
 Means. 
 
 13 05. 
 
 21 23.5 
 
 21 24.8 
 
 21 23.0 
 
 21 21.2 
 
 13 02. 5 
 
 7721311- 
 
66 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE DIP. 
 A. WITH A DIP CIRCLE. 
 
 The dip or inclination is usually measured by means of a dip circle, 
 in which a magnetized needle is mounted in such a way as to swing 
 in a vertical plane about an axle through its center of gravity. The 
 form of dip circle in general use is the Kew pattern shown in Figure 5. 
 The pivots of the needle rest on agate knife edges, the supports of 
 which are horizontal or vertical according as the instrument is intended 
 for use in high or low magnetic latitudes. The needle is placed in 
 position by means of a lifter so arranged that when the needle is 
 lowered onto the agate knife edges, the prolongation of the axis of 
 the pivots passes through the center of the graduated vertical circle. 
 The vertical circle is read by two verniers, and in older instruments 
 is usually graduated from zero at either side to 90 at the top and 
 bottom. Some of the more modern dip circles are graduated con- 
 tinuously from zero to 360. To the frame carrying the verniers are 
 attached two microscopes for pointing on the ends of the needle, so 
 placed that when the circle reading is zero the line joining the micro- 
 scopes is horizontal. On the frame carrying the microscopes are 
 blocks for holding in position the needle used as a deflector in the 
 determination of total intensity by Lloyd's method, so arranged that 
 when the needle is in position its axis is at right angles to the line 
 joining the microscopes. Four needles are usually provided, two 
 for regular dip observations and two for the determination of total 
 intensity. 
 
 Some of the newer dip circles of this pattern are provided with a 
 compass needle mounted in a rectangular box, which may be placed 
 on top of the dip circle as shown in Figure 5. The angle between the 
 magnetic meridian as defined by the compass needle and the line to 
 some mark of which the true bearing is known may be measured with 
 the aid of peep sights. 
 
 In dip circles of the Lloyd-Creak pattern (Fig. 9), designed for 
 observations on shipboard, but suitable also for land observations, 
 the pivots of the needle rest in agate cups instead of on agate knife 
 edges and the ends of the needle are in close proximity to the gradu- 
 ated circle so that the end of the needle and the adjacent graduation 
 are seen through the reading microscope at the same time. 
 
 In dip circles of the Brunner pattern a movable graduated circle is 
 immediately behind the needle and carries at the opposite extremities 
 of a diameter two small concave mirrors, the centers of which are as 
 far apart as the points of the needle. A setting is made by revolving 
 the graduated circle until the point of the needle and its reflected 
 image coincide. The angle of dip is then read off on a fixed vernier. 
 
 The adjustment of a dip circle is usually made with care in the 
 instrument shop before the instrument is sent into the field and 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE DIP. 
 
 67 
 
 seldom requires attention in the course of a season's work. As cases 
 may arise, however, where it is important to make adjustments in 
 the field, the following directions are given. 
 
 FIG. 5. Kew pattern dip circle. 
 
 The bearing surfaces of the agate knife edges should lie in a hori- 
 zontal plane which if produced would pass below the center of gradu- 
 ation of the vertical circle at a distance equal to the radius of the 
 pivots of the needles. A small level is provided to assist in making 
 
68 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 this adjustment. The height of the agate surfaces with reference to 
 the center of graduation may be tested by placing the needle in posi- 
 tion and keeping it nearly horizontal by a strip of wood or piece of 
 stiff paper under the north end. If the two ends read the same (or 
 180 apart, if the vertical circle is graduated to 360) the needle is at 
 the proper height. Readings should be made in both positions of the 
 microscopes to be sure that they are placed exactly 180 apart and 
 in both positions of the needle, face east and face west, to correct for 
 lack of symmetry. 
 
 The lifter should be adjusted so that when the needle is lowered on 
 to the agate surfaces its pivots will both touch at the same time and 
 its axis of rotation if produced would pass through the center of 
 graduation of the vertical circle, so that the needle will rotate in a 
 plane parallel to the graduation. The vertical line through the center 
 of graduation may be determined by suspending a small plumb bob 
 at the end of a silk fiber, so that the fiber intersects the graduation at 
 
 two points exactly 
 's 180 apart. A small 
 movable hook is pro- 
 vided for this pur- 
 pose in the top of 
 most dip circles. 
 
 The microscopes 
 for pointing on the 
 
 FIG. 6.-Remagnetization of dip needle. en( j g Q f ^ neec Q e 
 
 should be exactly 180 apart and should be focused for clear vision 
 before beginning observations. 
 
 To avoid the necessity of carrying a separate tripod for the dip 
 circle, an extra head is usually provided, which can be fastened on top 
 of the magnetometer tripod when dip observations are to be made. 
 When the dip circle has been placed in position its level is adjusted 
 and the instrument leveled in the usual way. 
 
 The observer should have constantly in mind the necessity of 
 guarding the needles from falls or other accidents and keeping them, 
 especially the pivots, clean and free from rust. The pivots are best 
 cleaned by sticking them into a piece of pith. Before beginning 
 observations, the bearing surfaces of the agates should also be cleaned 
 with the edge of a piece of paper or with pith. 
 
 The polarity of the dip needles must be reversed before beginning 
 a set of observations as well as in the middle of the set. This opera- 
 tion is performed in the following manner: Place one needle on the 
 reversing block after having determined which end is attracted down- 
 ward (north end). Take one bar magnet north end down in one 
 hand, and the other magnet south end down in the other hand, each 
 inclined about 30 to the horizon. Draw the magnets lightly from 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE DIP. 69 
 
 center to end of the needle, the magnet with north end down resting 
 on the end of the needle which was attracted downward. Make 5 
 strokes, then interchange the magnets and make 5 more. Then turn 
 the needle over and repeat the operation, making 20 strokes in all. 
 Care must be taken to stroke the same end of the needle with the 
 north end of the magnets throughout the operation. 
 
 The next step is to determine the plane of the magnetic meridian 
 and the corresponding reading of the horizontal circle. If the 
 instrument is provided with a compass attachment, the magnetic 
 meridian is readily determined by mounting the compass and turning 
 the instrument until the compass needle points to zero. The instru- 
 ment, that is, the plane of the vertical circle, is then in the magnetic 
 meridian, and the reading of the horizontal circle, as well as the one 
 differing by 180, is the one at which the circle is to be set when 
 making dip observations. Care must be taken to remove the com- 
 pass attachment before the dip observations are made, otherwise the 
 results will be vitiated. 
 
 In case no compass attachment is available, or in high magnetic 
 latitudes, where the compass needle is sluggish, the magnetic meridian 
 may be determined by taking advantage of the fact that when a dip 
 needle is mounted in a plane at right angles to the magnetic meridian 
 it will stand vertical. Raise the lifter, place one of the needles upon 
 it with its "face" toward the reading microscopes. (The face of the 
 needle is the side on which the letters A and B are engraved.) Set 
 the upper vernier at 90 and place the instrument at right angles to 
 the meridian, with the vertical circle toward the north. Lower the 
 needle onto the agates and bring it nearly to rest by means of succes- 
 sive liftings and lowerings. Turn the instrument in azimuth until 
 the swing of the upper end of the needle is bisected by the cross hair 
 of the upper microscope, gently lifting and lowering the needle several 
 times to make sure that it is swinging freely. Record the reading 
 of the horizontal circle. Set the lower vernier at zero and repeat the 
 operation, pointing on the lower end of the needle. Then turn the 
 instrument 180 in azimuth and repeat the operations, beginning with 
 the lower end of the needle. The mean of the four readings of the 
 horizontal circle is the reading of the magnetic prime vertical, and as 
 the circle is usually graduated by quadrants from to 90, the read- 
 ings of the magnetic meridian will be the same. The dip observations 
 proper may then be begun. It is usual to observe with two needles 
 at each station, and the work is so arranged that the middle time of 
 observation is the same for each needle. Observations should be 
 begun with the needle which was magnetized first. 
 
 Place the instrument in the magnetic meridian, (vertical) circle 
 east, needle face east, and reduce the swing of the needle to a small 
 arc by means of successive liftings, noting at the same time whether 
 
70 DIRECTIONS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 the swing of the needle appears to be free and regular. (If such is not 
 the case, the pivots and agates should be cleaned again.) Set on the 
 upper (south) end of the needle and read the upper vernier; then set 
 on the lower (north) end and read the lower vernier; then record the 
 two readings. Better results are obtained if the needle is observed 
 while swinging over a small arc, but it should not be disturbed between 
 the readings of the two ends, so that the swing at the time of the first 
 reading should be just sufficient to continue until the second has been 
 made. The needle is then lifted and lowered and the two ends read 
 in the reverse order. In general the two ends of the needle will not 
 read the same, but the difference between the two should be nearly 
 constant for a particular position of circle and needle. If such is not 
 the case, or if the readings before and after lifting differ by as much as 
 8', the readings should be repeated. 
 
 The circle is then turned 180 in azimuth and similar readings are 
 taken hi the position circle west, needle face west. Then the needle 
 is turned over and observations made with circle west, needle face 
 east, and finally the circle is reversed again and readings are taken in 
 the fourth position circle east, needle face west. The same operations 
 are then performed with needle No. 2. 
 
 Next the polarities of the two needles are reversed, so that the end 
 which was down before will now be up, and a second half set of obser- 
 vations is made, with No. 2, followed by a second half set with No. 1. 
 The tunes of beginning and ending should be noted for each needle. 
 
 The mean of all the readings gives the resulting dip, unless there 
 is much difference in the results before and after reversal of polarities, 
 in which case a small correction is required (Table VIII), as explained 
 on page 13. The computation is arranged for simplicity in such a 
 way that means of two quantities are taken successively, so that the 
 work may be performed mentally. 
 
 In case the vertical circle is graduated continuously from zero to 
 360, it will be necessary to subtract the circle readings from 180 
 or 360 for circle west in order to get the angle of dip. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE DIP. 
 
 71 
 
 Form 42. 
 
 MAGNETIC DIP. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 
 Dip circle No. 5678. Needle No. 2. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 
 End of needle marked A down. 
 
 Circle east. 
 
 . Circle west. Circle west. Circle east. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. Needle face east. Needle face west. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 1 
 S. N. S. N. S. N. 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 75 19 
 22 
 
 7520 
 22 
 
 75 39 ! 75 41 75 45 75 39 74 52 75 04 
 41 43 48 41 51 03 
 
 7520.5 
 
 75 21.0 
 
 7540.0! 7542.0 7546.5 7540.0 7451.5 7503.5 
 
 1 ! 
 
 75 20.8 
 75 31 
 
 75 41. 75 43. 2 74 57. 5 
 3. 9 75 20. 4 
 Mean: 75 25 / .6 
 
 Polarities reversed. End of needle marked B down. 
 
 Circle east. 
 
 Circle west. Circle west. Circle east. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. Needle face east. Needle face west. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. N. S. N. S. N. 
 
 
 
 7504 
 02 
 
 7512 
 10 
 
 75 52 75 46 75 41 75 45 75 15 75 13 
 
 55 49 41 44 14 14 
 
 75 03.0 
 
 75 11.0 
 
 7553.5 7547.5 75 41.0 j 7544.5 7514.5 7513.5 
 
 75 07.0 
 752 
 
 75 50.5 75 42.S 75 14.0 
 ;.8 7528.4 
 Mean: 75 28'. 6 
 
 Resulting dip: 75 27'. 1 
 
 Chron. time of begii 
 " " end 
 
 Mean chronometer 
 Chron. correction 01 
 
 Local mean time 
 Magnetic meridian 
 
 h.m. ' Instrument in mag. prime vertical, 
 ming 2 10 
 
 ' ms 2a2 Vertical Vwidlp Hor. circle 
 circle. -Needle. readings. 
 
 bime 2 21 1 
 
 i L. M. T. + 27 
 North S. end at 90 55 48 
 2 * " N. end at 90 56 15 
 . South N. end at 90 55 14 
 S. end at 90 55 50 
 
 reads 55 47 Mean 55 47 
 
72 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 B. WITH AN EARTH INDUCTOR. 
 
 A small earth inductor of the type designed by Wild is shown in 
 Figure 7. The coil is rotated by means of a gear and piece of flexible 
 shafting. A sudden starting or stopping of the rotation must be 
 avoided, as it is apt to break the flexible shaft. The galvanometer 
 should be mounted in a position where it can be observed conveniently 
 while rotating the coil. The axis of the vertical circle is leveled by 
 means of a stride level and the axis of the coil is placed in the mag- 
 netic meridian by means of a compass attachment. The observations 
 for determining the dip are made in the following manner : 
 
 Fio. 7. Wild pattern earth inductor. 
 
 (1) With vertical circle east, place the axis of the coil vertical by 
 means of the level inside the coil and read the vertical circle, first 
 with face of coil marked A east, then with face marked B east. 
 
 (2) Place the axis of coil approximately in the line of dip, rotate 
 the coil, and observe the galvanometer. If the instrument is set 
 accurately in the magnetic meridian, the galvanometer will be deflected 
 steadily in one direction. If it is not quite in the meridian, the gal- 
 vanometer will be deflected a small amount in one direction, and then 
 as the speed of rotation increases will go off in the opposite direction. 
 By successive trials find the setting at which no deflection of the 
 galvanometer is produced when the coil is rotated. Record the time 
 and the reading of the vertical circle. Rotate the coil in the opposite 
 direction, make another setting, and read the vertical circle. Make 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE DIP. 
 
 73 
 
 two more settings, one for rotation in each direction. The circle 
 should be clamped when the coil is being rotated. After the first 
 reading the changes in setting can be made with the tangent screw. 
 The operation will be facilitated if the crank for rotating the coil is 
 supported so that one hand may be free to move the tangent screw 
 while the other rotates the coil. 
 
 (3) Place the axis of the coil vertical again, and read the vertical 
 circle in two positions of the coil. 
 
 (4), (5), and (6) Proceed in the same manner with vertical circle 
 west. 
 
 The difference between the circle readings for axis vertical and axis 
 inclined gives the co-dip. The form of observation and computation 
 is shown in the following example: 
 
 Form 407. 
 
 Station, Sitka, Alaska. 
 Earth inductor No. 2. 
 
 MAGNETIC DIP. 
 
 Date, February 5, 1908. 
 Observer, H. M. W. Edmonds. 
 
 Magnetic meridian reads: 10 40'. 
 
 Vertical circle east. 
 
 Vertical circle west. 
 
 AXIS VERTICAL. 
 
 Coil. 
 
 (Order). A. B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 Coil. ! (Order). A. 
 
 B. l Mean. 
 
 
 
 
 ! i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 / 1 
 
 -. t 
 
 
 
 / / / 
 
 A-E 
 
 Begin 11. 10. 9 
 
 11.0 
 
 A-E Begin 
 
 9. 2 09. 2 09. 2 
 
 B-E (1) 10.8 10.8 
 
 10.8 
 
 B-E (4) 
 
 9. 9 09. 9 09. 9 
 
 A-E 
 
 End 11.0 10.9 
 
 11.0 
 
 A-E End 09.9 | 09.8 09.8 
 
 B-E (3) 10.9 10.8 
 
 10.8 
 
 B-E (6) 
 
 9.9' 09.7 ,09.8 
 
 Mean 
 
 10.9 
 
 
 Mean 09. 7 
 
 AXIS INCLINED. 
 
 Rot. 
 
 Chron. A. B. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 Rot. i Chron. A. 
 
 B. Mean. 
 
 
 h. m. '-:/ ' 
 
 , 
 
 h. m. 
 
 / / / 
 
 + 
 
 9 34 344 44. 5 44. 1 
 
 44.3 
 
 + 9 46 15 3 
 
 2. 1 32. 1 32. 1 
 
 - 
 
 (2) 52. 52. 
 
 52.0 
 
 (5) 3 
 
 J. 33. 33. 
 
 + 
 
 45. 7 45. 3 
 
 45.5 
 
 + 3 
 
 3.0 33.0 33.0 
 
 - 
 
 9 40 51.8 51.8 
 
 51.8 
 
 9 49 3 
 
 1. 9 32. 32. 
 
 Mean 9 37 344 48. 4 
 
 Mean 9 48 
 
 15 32. 5 
 
 Dip 
 
 74 37.5 
 
 
 Dip 7437.2 
 
 Mean dip 74 37'.35 
 
 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 
 Mean chronometer time . . 9 42 
 
 Chronometer correction . . 5 
 
 Local mean tiir 
 
 e 9 37 
 
 
 
74 DIBECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 As already explained, the determination of the horizontal inten- 
 sity involves two operations called li oscillations" and " deflections." 
 The observations at a station usually comprise two sets of each, 
 arranged in the order: Oscillations, deflections, deflections, oscilla- 
 tions. They are made with a magnetometer, two types of which 
 have been described, and as they usually follow a set of declination 
 observations it may be assumed that the instrument is in adjust- 
 ment, that the torsion has been removed from the fibers, and that 
 the long magnet is suspended. 
 
 TORSION OBSERVATIONS. 
 
 Point approximately on the middle division of the scale of the 
 magnet, reduce the arc of vibration to two divisions or less, and 
 read the horizontal circle. Read the torsion circle at the top of the 
 suspension tube and the scale of the magnet at the extremes of its 
 swing, as in declination observations, and record the readings in the 
 place provided on the form. Turn the torsion head 90 to the right 
 and read the scale of the magnet. Turn the torsion head 180 to 
 the left (i. e., 90 to the left of its original position) and again read 
 the scale. Turn the torsion head 90 to the right and read the scale. 
 The torsion circle now reads the same as at the beginning, and the 
 last scale reading should be very nearly the same as the first. The 
 differences between successive scale readings give the effect of 90, 
 180, and 90 of torsion, respectively, in scale divisions, and their 
 sum divided by four and multiplied by the arc value of one division 
 of the magnet scale is the average effect of 90 of torsion, the quan- 
 tity h required to correct the time of one oscillation for effect of 
 torsion. 
 
 OSCILLATIONS. 
 
 The oscillations are usually arranged in such a way as to give six 
 or eight independent determinations of the time of a selected number 
 of oscillations, which, for convenience in computing, should be some 
 multiple of 10. Increase the arc of vibration to about 20 divisions, 
 10 on either side of the middle, and determine the approximate 
 time of one oscillation by counting the number of seconds required 
 for four or six oscillations, and from that compute the time, approxi- 
 mating half a minute, which would be required for some odd num- 
 ber of oscillations. In the example six oscillations took about 34 
 seconds. Hence the time of five oscillations would be about 28 sec- 
 onds. The observer then arranged his program to observe every 
 fifth oscillation from to 35 and from 50 to 85, thus obtaining eight 
 independent determinations of the time of 50 oscillations. When 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 75 
 
 the observing program has been outlined in the first column of the 
 form the succeeding operations are as follows: Read the ther- 
 mometer and the scale of the magnet. Note and record on the 
 first line of the second column of the form the time when the middle 
 division of the scale of the magnet crosses the vertical line of the 
 reading telescope, the magnet swinging from left to right. About 
 28 seconds later note and record the time when the middle division 
 of the scale crosses the vertical line, magnet swinging from right to 
 left, and so on at intervals of about 28 seconds until eight readings 
 have been taken. Then read the thermometer and scale again. 
 Compute approximately the time when the fiftieth oscillation may be 
 expected, and when that time arrives begin a second series of eight 
 readings at intervals of about 28 seconds. At the close read the 
 thermometer and the scale of the magnet again. This completes a 
 set of oscillations. By this 
 method it is necessary to 
 look in the reading telescope 
 for only a few seconds at 
 the time of each observation. 
 A few seconds before the 
 predicted time of transit the 
 observer picks up the beat 
 of the chronometer and be- 
 gins to count half seconds 
 
 . FIG. 8. Four and six oscillations. 
 
 and then looks into the read- 
 ing telescope and waits for the transit to occur. Thus, for the fifth 
 oscillation he might pick up the beat at 9 h 38 m 35 s and count: Half- 
 six half - seven half - eight half - nine half - ten half-one half - 
 two half-three, the transit occurring between half and three. The 
 fraction of the half seqond can best be estimated by noting mentally 
 the relative position of the middle division and the vertical line of 
 the telescope for the beats just before and after the transit and 
 dividing up the half second in the same proportion that the space 
 is divided by the position at transit. It will usually be possible 
 to hear the beat of the chronometer while observing, but in case 
 this is prevented by noise the observer can with a little practice 
 learn to count the half seconds accurately without hearing the tick 
 for the short interval involved. The chronometer should be kept 
 far enough from the magnet to guard against the disturbing effect 
 of the steel spring, etc. 
 
 DEFLECTIONS. 
 
 Place the deflection bars in position, remove the long magnet from 
 the stirrup and suspend the short magnet in its place with scale erect ; 
 taking care to keep the two at least 20 cm. apart. Remove the 
 
76 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 thermometer from the magnet house and plug up the hole. Remove 
 the thermometer from its case (if it is in one) and place it inside the 
 east deflection bar. Place the long magnet with scale erect and north 
 end east at the shorter distance on the east bar and the torsion weight 
 as a counterpoise on the west bar. Be sure that the short magnet is 
 in the same horizontal plane with long magnet. Point on the middle 
 division of the scale of the suspended magnet, checking its swing to 
 about two divisions of the scale, and read the horizontal circle. 
 Move the long magnet out to the longer distance and again point on 
 the middle division of the scale of the suspended magnet and read the 
 horizontal circle. Turn the long magnet end for end and repeat the 
 pointing and reading; then move it up to the shorter distance and 
 make a fourth pointing and reading. Remove the thermometer from 
 the east bar, read it, and place it inside the west bar. Place the long 
 magnet with north end west at the shorter distance on the west bar 
 and the torsion weight on the east bar. The subsequent procedure 
 is the same as for long magnet east. Read the thermometer at the 
 close. The observer should bear in mind that it is the temperature 
 of the long magnet which is required both in oscillations and in deflec- 
 tions, and he should endeavor to place the thermometer so that it 
 will be of the same temperature as the magnet. If the temperature is 
 changing rapidly or if it is materially different on the two bars, more 
 readings should be taken than are specified above. 
 
 A second set of deflections should follow immediately after the first, 
 but with both magnets inverted and reversing the order of the posi- 
 tions of the long magnet. At its close, return the short magnet, 
 deflection bars, and torsion weight to the magnetometer case, suspend 
 the long magnet inverted, return the thermometer to its case and to 
 the hole in the magnet house, and make a second set of oscillations. 
 
 A second set of declination observations usually follows, but the 
 horizontal circle should first be shifted so as to bring the readings on 
 a different part of the graduation. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 77 
 
 Form 41. 
 
 HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 
 Magnetometer No. 20. Magnet 20 L. 
 
 Chronometer, 245, daily rate losing 0.2 on mean time. 
 
 OSCILLATIONS. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 
 Number of 
 oscillations. 
 
 Chronometer 
 time. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 t/ 
 
 Extreme scale 
 readings. 
 
 Circle reading. 
 
 
 
 
 ft. TO. 
 
 s. 
 
 o 
 
 d. 
 
 d. 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 
 
 9 38 14. 4 
 
 27.7 
 
 12.0 
 
 48.0 
 
 226 45 20 
 
 5 
 10 
 15 
 20 
 25 
 30 
 35 
 
 
 
 38 42. 9 
 39 11.6 
 39 40.1 
 40 08. 6 
 40 37.2 
 41 05.7 
 41 34.3 
 
 28.1 
 
 14.0 
 
 45.5 
 
 46 45 40 
 
 226 45 30 
 
 Time of 
 50 oscillations. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 TO. S. 
 
 50 
 
 
 
 9 42 59. 9 
 
 
 
 
 4 45.5 
 
 55 
 
 
 
 43 28.5 
 
 
 
 
 45.6 
 
 60 
 
 
 
 43 56.9 
 
 
 
 
 45.3 
 
 65 
 
 
 
 4425.7 
 
 
 
 
 45.6 
 
 70 
 
 
 
 44 54. 
 
 
 
 
 45.4 
 
 75 
 
 
 
 45 22. 7 
 
 
 
 . 
 
 45.5 
 
 80 
 
 
 
 45 51. 
 
 
 
 
 45.3 
 
 85 
 
 
 
 46 19.7 
 
 28.7 
 
 15. 7 43. 5 
 
 45.4 
 
 
 Means. 
 
 28.17 
 
 13. 90 45. 67 
 
 4 45.45 
 
 Formula: MH=n 2 E 
 
 [/ ^400 \ / 
 T2 I ' 1 1 1 -i-f 
 
 -*')?) (H 
 
 H 
 
 )] 
 
 
 "IT 
 
 Torsion observations. 
 
 Time of loscil. 
 Corr'n for rate * 
 
 T 
 
 Log T* 
 
 5.70900 
 
 + 1 
 
 Torsion 
 circle. 
 
 Scale. 
 
 Mean. Diff's. 
 
 
 5. 70901 
 
 
 
 d. 
 
 d. 
 
 d. d. 
 
 1. 51312 
 
 80 
 170 
 350 
 80 
 
 28.8 
 27.2 
 29.5 
 28.9 
 
 30.0 
 30.0 
 30.7 
 30.0 
 
 29.40 ! 
 28.60 ! 0.80 (<-*') = - 0.87 
 30.10 1.50 
 29.45 0.65 
 
 (,5400^ft/ 
 [l + (t-t')q] 
 
 0+4) 
 
 " Divisor 
 
 " 7T 2 K 
 
 " MH 
 
 12 
 - 18 
 123 
 
 1. 51429 
 
 Mean 
 
 ft= 0*74=1 '.48 
 
 3. 24733 
 
 One division of scale=2'.00. 
 
 1. 73304 
 
 Plus for losing rate and minus for gaining rate.' 
 
78 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Form 39. 
 
 HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Station, Smyrna Mills, Me. 
 Magnetometer, No. 20. 
 Long magnet deflecting. 
 
 DEFLECTIONS. 
 
 Date, Friday, August 5, 1910. 
 Observer, H. E. McComb. 
 Short magnet suspended. 
 
 Circle readings. 
 
 Mag- North 
 net. end. I. Distance r=30 cm. 
 
 II. Distance r-40 cm. 
 
 No. A. B. Mean. 
 
 No. 
 
 A. B. Mean. 
 
 
 
 2 
 3 
 
 
 |E. 1 236 57 10 57 20 57 15 
 W. 4 216 04 40 04 50 04 45 
 
 230 52 20 52 30 52 25 
 222 07 50 08 00 07 55 
 
 2tt 20 52 30 
 
 8 4430 
 
 1 W. 5 216 17 40 17 50 17 45 
 E. 8 236383038503840 
 
 6 
 7 
 
 222 11 10 11 20 11 15 
 230 45 20 45 30 45 25 
 
 2tt 20 20 55 
 
 834 10 
 
 Fondas: |- (. + fS) (.-) Jsi-.-als 
 
 I. II. 
 
 2 u (mean) 20 36 42 8 39 20 
 
 u 10 18 21 4 19 40 
 
 1 
 . 
 
 Value of log MH from oscillations: 
 
 h. m. 
 Began at 9 55 Temp. 26. 6 
 
 Ended at 10 13 " 28.0 
 
 Set. 
 
 I. 
 
 II. 
 
 log C 
 " Sin a 
 
 5.86935 
 9.25262 
 
 5. 49414 
 8.87773 
 
 a 
 M 
 
 8. 61673 
 
 8.61641 
 
 " MB 
 H 
 
 1.73304 
 9.17488 
 
 1.73304 
 9. 17472 
 
 H 
 
 .14958 
 
 .14953 
 
 log M 
 Red'n 
 20 
 log M t 
 
 to 
 
 i 
 
 2.55816 
 + 152 
 
 2.55968 
 
 2.55832 
 + 152 
 
 2.55984 
 
 Mean 10 04 /= 27. 3 
 Chron. corr'n +27 
 
 L. M. T. 10 31 
 
 Mean 
 
 2.55976 
 
 COMPUTATION. 
 
 The computation involves simply the substitution of the observed 
 quantities and the instrumental constants in the formulas and requires 
 little explanation. The observer is supplied with a table of constants 
 which gives, for the magnetometer he is to use, the results of the special 
 observations made for determining the scale value, moment of inertia, 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE HORIZONTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 79 
 
 temperature coefficient, distribution coefficients, and induction coeffi- 
 cient of the long magnet and the deflection distances, and the com- 
 bination of the last four (log C) which enters into the deflection formula. 
 For the magnetometer used in the example, this table was as follows : 
 
 Constants of magnetometer No. 20. 
 One division of scale of long magnet = 2'. 00. 
 
 Deflection distances. log C at 20 C. 
 
 cm. 
 
 29.9874 log =1.47694 5.86953 
 
 40.0054 1.60212 5.49432 
 
 For an increase of 1 C. in temperature log C must be diminished 
 by 0.000025. (See Table VII.) 
 
 Temperature coefficient # = 0.00048 for 1 C.; log (1 + q) = 0.000208 
 Distribution coefficient P= 0.955 
 
 Induction factor JJL 
 
 TT 
 
 When log ^r> 
 
 6.81 
 6.50 
 
 6.55 
 6.60 
 6.65 
 6.70 
 6.75 
 6.80 
 
 log 
 
 log// = 0.833 
 
 0.00093 
 
 105 
 118 
 132 
 148 
 166 
 186 
 
 Moment of inertia K 
 
 Temp. 
 0C. 
 10 
 20 
 30 
 40 
 
 log 
 
 3. 24703 
 713 
 724 
 735 
 745 
 
 Computing the elapsed times between oscillations and 50, 5 and 
 55, 10 and 60, etc., gives 8 independent values of the time of 50 
 oscillations. The mean of these 8 quantities divided by 50 is the 
 time of 1 oscillation, T, which must, however, be corrected for 
 the rate of the chronometer. The loss in 24 hours being 8 .2, the 
 loss in 5 s . 7 would be 0.2x5.7-^86400, or, since the correction to the 
 fifth decimal place is desired, 0.2x5.7x1.16. Table V gives the 
 value of this correction for different rates and different times of 
 oscillation. The formula for MH is arranged for logarithmic com- 
 putation, so that log Jffl = log 7i*K-[\og T 2 + log( g ^i. ^ 
 
 \ o4UU fl / 
 
 + log ( 1 + (t t'} q) + log ( 1 + fj. ^rr 1 . As the second and third fac- 
 tors of the divisor never differ much from unity, their logarithms 
 
80 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 are always nearly zero and it may be assumed without appreciable 
 error that the logarithm varies directly as the variable part of the 
 factor, i. e. : , 
 
 log [5400 ^- (5400 -Ji)] = h log [5400 -s- (5400 - 1)] 
 log [1 + (*-*') q] = (t-t') log (l+q) 
 
 Now log (5400-^5399) = 0.00008. Hence the torsion correction, ex- 
 pressed in units of the fifth decimal place of the logarithm is found 
 by multiplying by 8 the effect of 90 of torsion. In the example, 
 7i=l'.48 and the corrective term is therefore .00012. The value of 
 this factor may also be obtained from Table VI. In the example 
 *-*' = 27. 30-28.17 = -0.87. From the table of constants for this 
 instrument it will be seen that 
 
 log (l + q) = 0.000208 
 hence log [l + (t-t') q] = . 000208 (-0.87)= -.00018 
 
 A table may readily be prepared for a particular instrument giving 
 the value of this factor for different values of (t t'). The value of 
 
 7T\ 
 
 be found in the table of constants for different 
 
 ( 
 
 H H 
 
 values of log ,,, and the value of log ,, is obtained from the com- 
 
 putation of deflections. The value of log T^K for the temperature 
 of the oscillations is found by interpolation from the table of constants. 
 When the computation has been completed, the value of log M H 
 is carried forward to the deflection form. 
 
 The differences between the pairs of circle readings at the two 
 distances give two values of 2 u, double the deflection angle, for each 
 distance, from which the values of u are obtained. The values of 
 log C for the two deflection distances are given in the table of con- 
 stants for the temperature 20 C. In the example the deflections 
 were made at a temperature 27.30 C. Hence the tabular values of 
 log<7 must be decreased by 0.000025 (27.30 -20) = 0.00018. The 
 
 TJ 
 
 values of log ^ are then obtained by subtracting log sin u from log C. 
 
 In good work the two values seldom differ by more than 0.00050. 
 Should they differ by as much as 0.00100 the computation should 
 be revised and if no mistake is found the observations should be 
 repeated. 
 
 TJ 
 
 The computation of H and log M from log H M and log ^ follows. 
 
 The resulting values of log M are for the temperature of deflections, 
 27.30. The magnetic moment of a magnet varies with temperature, 
 *,s we have seen, and in order to compare the values obtained at 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TOTAL INTENSITY. 81 
 
 different times it is necessary to reduce all results to the same tem- 
 perature. 20 centigrade has been adopted as a standard and all 
 values of log M are reduced to that temperature. For practical pur- 
 poses this may be done by means of the formula 
 
 log M 20 = log M+ (t - 20) log (1 + q) 
 
 In this case (-20) = 7.3 and log (1 +q) = 0.000208. 
 Hence the correction to be applied to log M is +0.00152. 
 
 Experience has shown that when a magnet is first magnetized its 
 magnetic moment decreases quite rapidly. The rate of loss of mag- 
 netism gradually diminishes . and after a few years becomes very 
 small. A comparison of the values of log M 2Q obtained at different 
 times in the course of a season's work is therefore valuable for several 
 reasons. (1) It furnishes a test of the accuracy of the horizontal 
 intensity determinations and sometimes leads to the detection of 
 errors of observation or computation. (2) It furnishes the means of 
 correcting the adopted value of temperature coefficient if there is 
 considerable variation in temperature involved in the series of 
 observations. (3) An accident to the magnet, such as a fall, or 
 improper packing for transportation, will usually be revealed by a 
 sudden decrease in log M 20 . 
 
 DETERMINATION OF THE TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 The determination of total intensity with a dip circle by Lloyd's 
 method involves two kinds of observations: Dip with loaded needle, 
 and deflections. As the accuracy of the method depends upon the 
 constancy of the condition of the needles between the time of stand- 
 ardization and the time of observation, every care must be taken to 
 secure that constancy. The needles must never be remagnetized 
 and must be kept from close proximity to disturbing influences. 
 The weight used in the standardization observations should be left 
 in place in the needle and any possibility of bending avoided. When 
 the standardization observations are made, that weight should be 
 selected which will be best suited to the region in which the instru- 
 ment is to be used. The weight should be in the south end for 
 places north of the magnetic equator and in the north end for places 
 south of the magnetic equator, so that its effect will be to diminish 
 the true dip. In the formula involved, F= C V cos /' esc u esc u' f 
 l f is the dip with loaded needle, u is the angle of deflection, and 
 u' = 11' . The effect on the result of an error in an observed value 
 of'/' will tend to diminish as I' approaches zero and u f approaches 
 90. The best approximation to these limits is usually secured by 
 using a weight sufficient to cause the loaded end of the needle to 
 7721311 6 
 
82 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 dip by a small amount, so that /' differs from zero by about the 
 same amount that u' differs from 90. 
 
 If the season's work covers such a large range of dip that the weight 
 used during standardization can not be used throughout, or if for 
 some other reason a change in the weight becomes necessary, the 
 change should be made, if possible, at a place where observations can 
 be made before the change as well as after. 
 
 The remarks regarding care and cleaning of needles and agates and 
 adjustment of the dip circle made in connection with determination 
 of the dip apply with equal force here. The instrument having been 
 leveled and placed in the magnetic meridian, the observations of dip 
 with loaded needle follow in each of the four positions: Circle east, 
 needle face east; circle west, needle face west; circle west, needle face 
 east; circle east, needle face west, in the same manner as for regular 
 dip observations. If the south end is below the horizon the dip is 
 regarded as negative. The loaded needle is then fastened in the place 
 provided between the reading microscopes, "face" out, and covered 
 by the brass shield. The other (lighter) intensity needle is placed on 
 the lifter face east and lowered on to the agate supports. As the 
 microscopes are turned in order to make a pointing on the suspended 
 needle, carrying with them the deflecting needle, it will be found that 
 there are two positions in which the suspended needle may be pointed 
 upon by the microscopes, in one of which it is deflected toward the ver- 
 tical and in the other away from the vertical. The microscope which 
 in one case points on the north end of the needle will in the other case 
 point on the south end. The microscopes are considered direct (D) 
 when the south (upper) end of the suspended needle is deflected 
 toward the right and reversed (R) when it is deflected toward the 
 left. The angular difference between the two positions of the needle 
 is 2u, twice the angle of deflection. It may happen that the sus- 
 pended needle will be deflected out of one quadrant into the adjoin- 
 ing one. In a dip circle where the vertical circle is graduated in 
 quadrants from in the horizon to 90 at the top and bottom, this 
 fact must be noted in the record in order that the deflection angle 
 may be computed correctly. Thus, for a dip of 70 and a deflection 
 angle of 30 the circle readings would be 40 in the same quadrant 
 and 80 in the next. 
 
 Deflection observations are made with microscopes D and li in 
 each of the four positions: Circle east, needle face east; circle west, 
 needle face west; circle west, needle face east; circle east, needle face 
 west. 
 
 A second set of dip with loaded needle, similar to the first, is then 
 made. In the intensity observations, as in regular dip, two point- 
 ings on each end of the needle are to be made in each position, the 
 needle being lifted between. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TOTAL INTENSITY. 83 
 
 In the Lloyd-Creak form of dip circle the needle is supported in 
 agate cups, and before a reading is taken the needle must be jarred 
 to a position of equilibrium by rubbing or tapping a metal point on 
 top of the instrument with an ivory scraper. 
 
 A value of dip may be obtained from the deflection observations, 
 since the suspended needle is deflected by approximately equal 
 amounts in opposite directions from its undeflected position. 
 
 A sample set of observations and computation is given below. 
 When the vertical circle is graduated from zero at the sides to 90 at 
 the top and bottom and the needle lies in the same quadrant for both 
 positions of the microscopes, direct and reversed, half the difference 
 of the two circle readings gives the deflection angle and half their 
 sum gives the dip. When the needle is in one quadrant for micro- 
 scopes direct and the adjacent one for microscopes reversed, 
 
 and /_90-- 
 
 When the vertical circle is graduated continuously from to 360, 
 the readings with circle west are to be substracted from 180 in taking 
 the means. 
 
 Then D-R D + R 
 
 u = 2~~ and 1= 2 
 
 For obtaining u' =11' the best available value of 7 must be used. 
 This is generally the mean of the results with the two regular dip 
 needles, with the instrumental corrections applied. These corrections 
 and the value of log C are determined at some place where the dip 
 and horizontal intensity have been accurately determined by other 
 means, and are usually supplied to the observer from the office. 
 The formula arranged for computation by logarithms is: 
 
 i w\ n cos ~^ csc u "^ & csc 
 
 As it usually happens that the deflection angle is different for the 
 two halves of the deflection set, the form is arranged for computing 
 the two halves separately and two values of log C are determined 
 to correspond. The form is also arranged to compute the horizontal 
 intensity from the formula H^ F cos 7. 
 
84 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Form 389. 
 
 TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Station, Fernandina, Fla. 
 
 Dip circle No. 35. 
 
 End of needle marked B north. 
 
 DIP WITH LOADED NEEDLE. 
 
 Date, April 14, 1910 
 Observer, S. S. Winslow. 
 Needle No. 4. Weight No. 6. 
 
 North end* up. 
 
 Circle east. Circle west. 
 
 Circle west. 
 
 Circle east. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 8. 
 
 . N. 
 
 153 35 
 38 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 15408 
 08 
 
 / 
 
 334 02 
 05 
 
 333 38 
 42 
 
 ' 
 26 24 
 25 
 
 206 27 
 30 
 
 25 40 
 40 
 
 205 32 
 35 
 
 36.5 
 
 40.0 24.5 
 
 28.5 
 
 40.0 
 
 33.5 
 
 08.0 
 
 03.5 
 
 -2621.8 -2626.5 
 -26 24. 2 
 Mean /', Set 1. -26 
 
 -25 36.8 
 -25 
 
 04'. 8 
 
 -25 54. 2 
 45.5 
 !*'-/-/' 88 29'. 3 
 
 Circle east. 
 
 Circle west. 
 
 Circle west. 
 
 Circle east. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. 
 
 Needle face east. 
 
 Needle face west. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 153 28 
 25 
 
 333 30 
 27 
 
 26 31 
 28 
 
 206 25 
 25 
 
 25 46 
 45 
 
 205 40 
 38 
 
 154 10 
 08 
 
 334 00 
 333 58 
 
 26.5 
 
 28.5 
 
 29.5 
 
 25.0 
 
 45.5 
 
 39.0 
 
 oy.ii 
 
 59.0 
 
 -2632.5 -2627.2 
 -26 29.9 
 Mean /', Set 2. -26 
 
 -2542.2 -2556.0 
 -25 49. 1 
 09'. 5 u'-/-/'=88 34'. 
 
 Chron. time. Temp. 
 h. m. 
 Beginning 9 55 20.7 
 Ending 10 21 20.8 
 
 Mean 10 08 20.75 
 Corr'n on L. M. T. +23 
 
 Remarks: 
 
 L. M. T. 10 31 
 Magnetic meridian reads 
 
 84 17 
 
 Note whether north end is up or down. Do not reverse polarity. 
 
DETERMINATION OF THE TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 85 
 
 Form 389. 
 
 TOTAL INTENSITY DEFLECTIONS. 
 
 Station, Fernandina, Fla. Date, April 14, 1910. 
 
 Dip circle No. 35. Needle No. 4 deflecting, No. 3 suspended. 
 
 Circle east, needle face east. 
 
 Circle west, needle face west. 
 
 D.* 
 
 R.* 
 
 R.* 
 
 D.* 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 274 17 94 21 
 15 25 
 
 01 01 
 
 211 30 31 33 
 
 28 30 
 
 / Of 
 
 266 58 87 00 
 55 86 58 
 
 1 
 
 329 22 
 23 
 
 149 23 
 23 
 
 16. 23. 
 
 29. 31. 5 
 
 56. 5 59. 
 
 22.5 
 
 23.0 
 
 94 19.5 
 125 49. 7 
 62 54. 9 
 7 = 62 22. 3 
 
 31 30.2 
 62 49. 3 
 31 24.6 
 
 93 02. 2 
 62 25. 
 31 12.5 
 u = 31 18. 6 
 
 30 37. 2 
 123 39. 4 
 61 49.7 
 
 Circle west, needle face east. 
 
 Circle east, needle face west. 
 
 D. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 210 30 30 38 
 28 40 
 
 273 10 
 15 
 
 93 29 
 30 
 
 329 02 149 10 
 03 10 
 
 265 24 85 36 
 27 32 
 
 02. 5 10. 
 
 25. 5 34. 
 
 29. 39. 
 
 12.5 
 
 29.5 
 
 30 53. 8 
 125 24.0 
 62 42. 
 7 = 62 19. 8 
 
 94 30. 2 
 63 36. 4 
 31 48.2 
 
 30 34. 
 62 47. 
 31 23.5 
 u = 31 35. 9 
 
 93 
 123 
 61 
 
 21.0 
 55.0 
 57.5 
 
 Chron. time. Temp. 
 
 h. m. 
 Beginning 10 05 21.0 
 Ending 10 20 20.8 
 
 Computation of F and 
 
 77. 
 
 log cos 7' 9. 95336 ! 
 " cscw 0.28427 
 " cscu' 0.00015 
 
 9. 95307 
 0.28070 
 0.00014 
 
 Mean 
 Corr'n on L. M. T. 
 
 L. M. T. 
 
 10 12 20.9 
 +23 
 
 10 35 
 
 Sum 0. 23778 
 Half sum 0.11889 
 log C 9.62333 
 
 0. 23391 
 0. 11696 
 9. 62497 
 
 " F 9. 74222 ! 
 
 9. 74193 
 
 7 from deflections 62 21. 
 7 from regular dipJNo. 1 62 22. 3 
 needles (No. 2 62 26.7 
 
 Mean 9. 74208 F= . 55218 
 log cos 7 9. 66574 
 
 " 77 9.40782 77=. 25575 
 
 * If the vertical circle is graduated in quadrants, note whether the upper (south) 
 end of the suspended needle is north or south of the vertical. 
 
DIRECTIONS FOR OBSERVATIONS AT SEA. 
 INTRODUCTION. 
 
 The instruments and methods employed for determining the 
 magnetic elements on land require a number of modifications for 
 observations on board ship. On account of the instability of the 
 ship as an observing platform, a magnetometer with fiber suspension 
 can not be used and in the dip circle agate cups take the place of 
 agate knife edges. The instruments must be mounted in gimbals 
 in order that they may remain approximately level in spite of the 
 motion of the ship. It is usual to determine the magnetic declination 
 by means of the standard compass and an azimuth circle, and the dip 
 and total intensity by means of a Lloyd-Creak dip circle. 
 
 On account of the disturbing effect of the iron and steel which 
 enter more and more into the construction of modern ships, the 
 direct results of magnetic observations on shipboard are different 
 for different headings of the ship, since they represent the combined 
 effect of the earth's magnetism and the ship's magnetism, and means 
 must be provided to separate the resultant into its component parts. 
 It is customary, therefore, to make observations on 8 or 16 equi- 
 distant headings while steaming in a circle, first in one direction and 
 then in the other. As a complete determination of dip and intensity 
 on each heading of the forward and back swings would consume too 
 much time, the practice has been adopted by the Coast and Geodetic 
 Survey of observing deflections alone while swinging ship in one direc- 
 tion and loaded dip alone while swinging in the opposite direction. 
 In addition to the total intensity derived from the combination of 
 these observations, a value of dip on each heading results from the 
 deflection observations. 
 
 The determination of declination, dip, and total intensity at sea 
 requires, first, that observations be made with the dip circle at a 
 base station on shore at the beginning and end of the cruise, to 
 determine the intensity constant for the particular weight used at 
 sea and the correction to the dip as derived from the deflection ob- 
 servations; and, second, that the ship be swung at the beginning and 
 end of the cruise (and, if possible, in the highest and lowest latitudes 
 reached) at a place near shore where the declination, dip, and in- 
 tensity are known with reasonable accuracy from shore observations, 
 in order to determine the deviations of the standard compass and of 
 dip and intensity at the dip circle position. 
 
 87 
 
88 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 For the general theory of the analysis of a ship's magnetism the 
 reader is referred to the various publications of the hydrographic 
 offices of different nations, at least one of which is to be found on 
 almost every ship. (E. g. "Practical Problems and the Compensa- 
 tion of the Compass in the United States Navy;" (British) "Admiralty 
 Manual for the Deviations of the Compass;" "Der Kompass an Bord," 
 issued by the Deutsche Seewarte, etc.) 
 
 DECLINATION. 
 
 The amount by which the compass needle points east or west of 
 true north is called the compass error. 
 
 The amount by which the compass needle points east or west of 
 magnetic north is called the deviation. In each case east is* considered 
 positive and west negative. As the angle between the true meridian 
 and the magnetic meridian is the magnetic declination, it follows 
 that: 
 
 Compass error Decimation = Deviation . 
 
 Hence for the determination of the declination on board ship 
 it is necessary to know the compass error and the deviation. The 
 deviation may be represented approximately by an equation of the 
 form 
 
 Deviation = A +B sin + C cos + D sin 2 + E cos 2 
 
 in which is the magnetic heading of the ship, counted from north 
 around by east. The second member of this equation may be divided 
 into three parts: A, which is constant for all headings; (B sin + C 
 cos ), called the semicircular deviation, the values on two headings 
 180 apart being equal but of opposite sign; (D sin 2 + E'cos 2), 
 called the quadrantal deviation, the values on two headings 90 apart 
 being equal but of opposite sign. In theory, the determination of 
 the deviations on any five headings will give five equations from which 
 to compute the five coefficients A, B, C } D, E. In practice, however, 
 it is found that satisfactory results can not be obtained unless ob- 
 servations are made on a greater number of headings properly dis- 
 tributed. It is apparent that when observations are made on 8 or 16 
 equidistant headings, the mean of the deviations will be A, the 
 constant part of the deviation, and the computation of the other 
 coefficients will be much simplified. For observations made in this 
 way near shore where the declination is known; 
 
 Mean compass error Declination = A 
 and for observations at sea when A has been determined: 
 Mean compass error A = Declination. 
 
DECLINATION. 89 
 
 From this it will be seen that when observations are made on a mul- 
 tiple of four equidistant headings it is not necessary to compute the 
 coefficients B, C, D, E in order to determine the declination, but in- 
 asmuch as the deviations on all headings are required for purposes 
 of navigation, and as observations are sometimes made on only two 
 or three headings, it is important to determine B, C, D, E in order 
 that the deviation on any desired heading may be computed. 
 
 In the case of observations on 16 equidistant headings, there will 
 be 16 observation equations from which to compute the four co- 
 efficients by the method of least squares. In the formation of the 
 normal equations the observation equations may be combined in 
 such a way as to eliminate the constant term A and to leave only a 
 single unknown in each normal equation, as shown in the sample 
 computation given later on. As the declination is not known at sea 
 and the final value of A is not determined until the end of the season's 
 work, it is usually more convenient to make the analysis of that 
 part of the deviations which does not involve A. 
 
 Since 
 
 Compass error Declination = Deviation 
 
 and Mean compass error Declination = A 
 
 Compass error Mean compass error = Deviation A 
 
 For want of a better term this part of the deviation has been called 
 "star deviation" and designated by an asterisk after the word, 
 deviation*. 
 
 Deviation* = Deviation - A = B sin + C cos r +D sin 2 + E cos 2. 
 
 The compass error is usually determined in one of three ways: 
 (1) By observations of the sun; (2) by reciprocal bearings with a 
 shore station; (3) by observing on a range of which the true bearing 
 is known. 
 
 (1) The compass bearing of the sun is observed by means of an 
 azimuth circle, and the true bearing is computed from the latitude 
 of the place and the local mean time of observation. This requires, 
 in addition to the latitude, a knowledge of the longitude and the cor- 
 rection of the chronometer on standard time. The computation is 
 very much simplified by the use of United States Hydrographic 
 Publication No. 71, or similar azimuth tables. 
 
 (2) For observations near shore it is sometimes more convenient to 
 make use of the method of reciprocal bearings. An observer on shore 
 measures the angle between the ship's binnacle and a reference mark, 
 at the same moment that the observer on the ship measures the com- 
 pass bearing of the shore station. If the true bearing of the reference 
 
90 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 mark from the shore station is known, the true bearing of the shore 
 station from the ship at the time of the compass observation may be 
 computed. An older form of this method, and one wliich may be 
 used when azimuth observations are impossible, is to mount a com- 
 pass on shore and observe the compass bearing of the ship, the dif- 
 ference of the reciprocal bearings being the deviation for that particu- 
 lar heading, provided the shore station is free of local disturbance and 
 the compass free of index error. 
 
 (3) In some harbors the true bearings of well defined range lines 
 have been computed for the convenience of navigators and the com- 
 pass error may be determined by observing the compass bearing of one 
 of these ranges. 
 
 The forms of record and computation are shown in the following 
 example. In this case the compass bearing of the sun was observed 
 on 16 equidistant headings while swinging first with starboard helm 
 and then with port helm, but only the starboard observations are 
 reproduced. 
 
 Form 364. 
 
 OBSERVATION OP COMPASS DEVIATIONS. 
 
 Steamer. Sache. 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. 
 
 Weather, clear. Sea, choppy. Wind, SSW. 
 
 Ship swung with starboard helm. 
 
 Standard compass Xo. 30367. 
 Observer, W. C. Hodgkins. 
 
 Ship's head 
 by standard 
 compass. 
 
 Time by 
 hack watch 
 No. 141. 
 
 Sun's bearing 
 by standard 
 compass. 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 wsw. 
 
 ft. m. s. 
 5 49 40 
 
 , 
 
 N. 70 50 W. 
 
 1 
 
 Latitude 38 20 
 
 sw. 
 
 52 50 70 30 
 
 Longitude 76 22.3 
 
 SSW. 
 
 55 50 7000 
 
 
 s. 
 
 SSE. 
 SE. 
 
 58 10 
 59 50 
 6 0205 
 
 7000 
 70 05 
 69 10 
 
 Chronometer comparison: 
 
 
 ft. m. *. 
 
 ESE. 
 
 05 42 
 
 67 30 
 
 Hack reads 
 
 5 10 19 
 
 E. 
 
 07 30 
 
 66 05 
 
 Chron. 3012 
 
 100800 
 
 ENE. 
 
 10 10 
 
 65 00 
 
 Chron. corr'n 
 
 + 54 
 
 NE. 
 
 12 30 
 
 6425 
 
 G. M. T. 
 
 10 08 54 
 
 NNE. 
 
 15 10 
 
 64 20 
 
 E. 
 
 - 5 05 
 
 N. 
 
 1700 
 
 6600 
 
 G. A. T. 
 
 10 03 49 
 
 NNW. 
 
 19 40 
 
 6700 
 
 Longitude 
 
 5 05 29 
 
 NW. 
 
 22 20 
 
 67 30 
 
 Local A. T. 
 
 4 58 20 
 
 WNW. 
 
 24 05 
 
 07 35 
 
 Hack reads 
 
 5 10 19 
 
 W. 
 
 26 10 
 
 67 05 
 
 Hack correction on local 
 
 - 11 59 
 
 
 
 
 apparent time 
 
 
DECLINATION. 
 
 91 
 
 Form 355. 
 
 COMPUTATION OP COMPASS DEVIATIONS. 
 
 Steamer, Sache. 
 
 Lat. 38 20' N., long. 76 22'.3. 
 
 Ship swung with starboard helm. 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. 
 Sun's declination, 22 14' N. 
 
 Ship's 
 head. 
 
 Local 
 apparent 
 time. 
 
 Sun's 
 bearing by 
 compass. 
 
 Sun's 
 azimuth 
 from tables. 
 
 Error of 
 standard 
 compass. 
 
 Deviation.* 
 
 
 h. m. s. 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 , 
 
 / 
 
 N. 
 
 6 05 02 
 
 N, 66 00 W. 
 
 N. 71 31 W. 
 
 5 31 W. 
 
 32 W. 
 
 NNE. 
 
 6 03 12 
 
 64 20 
 
 71 46 
 
 7 26 
 
 2 27 W. 
 
 NE. 
 
 6 00 32 
 
 64 25 
 
 72 09 
 
 7 44 
 
 2 45 W. 
 
 ENE. 
 
 5 58 12 
 
 65 00 
 
 72 28 7 28 
 
 2 29 W. 
 
 E. 
 
 55 32 
 
 66 05 
 
 72 51 6 46 
 
 1 47 W. 
 
 ESE. 53 44 
 
 6730 
 
 73 06 5 36 
 
 37 W. 
 
 SE. 50 07 
 
 69 10 
 
 73 36 4 26 
 
 33 E. 
 
 SSE. 47 52/ 
 
 70 05 
 
 73 55 
 
 3 50 
 
 1 09 E. 
 
 S. 46 12 
 
 70 00 
 
 74 09 4 09 
 
 50 E. 
 
 SSW. 43 52 70 00 
 
 74 28 
 
 4 28 
 
 31 E. 
 
 SW. 40 52 70 30 
 
 74 54 
 
 4 24 
 
 35 E. 
 
 WSW. 37 42 70 50 
 
 75 20 
 
 4 30 
 
 29 E. 
 
 W. 6 14 12 67 05 
 
 70 13 
 
 3 08 
 
 - 51 E. 
 
 WNW. 12 07 67 35 
 
 70 31 
 
 2 56 
 
 203E. 
 
 NW. 10 22 67 30 
 
 70 46 
 
 3 16 
 
 1 43 E. 
 
 NNW. 
 
 07 42 67 00 
 
 71 08 
 
 4 08 
 
 51 E. 
 
 Means 
 
 5 56 42 67 42 
 
 72 41 
 
 4 59 W. 
 
 
 Magnetic declination from shore observations, 5 25' W. 
 
92 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Form 356. 
 
 Steamer, Bnche. 
 
 ANALYSIS OF COMPASS DEVIATIONS.* 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. 
 
 
 Deviation.* 
 
 (D 
 
 
 Deviation.* 
 
 (2) 
 
 
 (3) 
 
 Ship's 
 
 
 
 Ship's 
 
 
 
 
 
 head. 
 
 
 
 
 head. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 Port. 
 
 Starb. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 
 Port. Starb. 
 
 Mean. 
 
 
 (D+(2) 
 
 N. 
 
 - 53 
 
 - 32 
 
 - 42 
 
 S. 
 
 ' i ' 
 
 + 39 +50 
 
 + 44 
 
 a 
 
 + 2 
 
 NNE. 
 
 - 142 
 
 - 147 
 
 - 144 
 
 ssw. 
 
 - 14 +31 
 
 + 8 
 
 b 
 
 - 136 
 
 NE. 
 
 - 148 
 
 - 165 
 
 - 156 
 
 s\v. 
 
 - 17 +35 
 
 + 9 
 
 c 
 
 - 147 
 
 ENE. 
 
 - 105 
 
 - 149 
 
 - 127 
 
 wsw. 
 
 + 65 +29 
 
 + 47 
 
 d 
 
 - 80 
 
 E. 
 
 - 79 
 
 - 107 
 
 - 93 
 
 w. 
 
 +106 + 111 
 
 + 108 
 
 e 
 
 + 5 
 
 ESE. 
 
 - 17 
 
 - 37 
 
 - 27 
 
 WNW. 
 
 +96 +123 
 
 + 110 
 
 f 
 
 + .83 
 
 SE. 
 
 + 45 
 
 + 33 
 
 + 39 
 
 NW. 
 
 + 114 + 103 
 
 + 108 
 
 9 
 
 + 147 
 
 SSE. 
 
 + 58 
 
 + 69 
 
 + 64 
 
 NNW. 
 
 + 55 +51 
 
 + 53 
 
 h 
 
 + 117 
 
 Computation of B and C. 
 
 Computation of D and E. 
 
 (4) 
 
 (5) 
 
 
 (6) 
 
 
 (7) 
 
 (8) 
 
 
 
 (9) 
 
 
 (D-(2) 
 
 
 (4)X(5) 
 
 
 (4)X(6) 
 
 From (3) 
 
 
 (7)X(8) 
 
 
 (7)X(9) 
 
 - 86 
 
 .000 
 
 mi 
 
 1.000 
 
 - 86 
 
 a e 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 152 
 
 .383 
 
 - 58 
 
 .924 
 
 - 140 
 
 - 13 
 
 .000 
 
 
 00 
 
 1.000 
 
 - 13 
 
 - 165 
 
 .707 
 
 - 117 
 
 .707 
 
 - 117 
 
 b-f 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 174 
 
 .924 
 
 - 161 
 
 .383 
 
 - 67 
 
 - 219 
 
 .707 
 
 - 
 
 155 
 
 .707 
 
 - 155 
 
 - 201 
 
 1.000 
 
 - 201 
 
 .000 
 
 00 
 
 c-g 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 - 137 
 
 .924 
 
 - 127 
 
 - .383 
 
 + 52 
 
 - 294 
 
 1.000 
 
 - 
 
 294 
 
 .000 
 
 00 
 
 - 69 
 
 .707 
 
 - 49 
 
 - .707 
 
 + 49 
 
 d-h 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 + 11 
 
 .383 
 
 + 4 
 
 - .924 
 
 - 10 
 
 - 197 
 
 .707 
 
 - 
 
 139 
 
 - .707 
 
 + 139 
 
 
 8B 
 
 - 709 
 
 8C 
 
 - 319 
 
 
 8D 
 
 
 
 588 
 
 8E 
 
 - 29 
 
 
 B 
 
 - 89 
 
 C 
 
 - 40 
 
 
 D 
 
 - 
 
 74 
 
 E 
 
 4 
 
 N. B. When observations are made on only 8 points, the divisors must be changed from 8 to 4. 
 
DECLINATION. 
 
 COMPARISON OF OBSERVED AND COMPUTED DEVIATIONS.* 
 Deviation*= Deviation A= B sin C+ Ccos Z.+D sin 2 Z+E'cos 2 C. 
 
 C is the compass azimuth of the ship's heading, counting from north around by east, south, 
 and west to 360. 
 
 93 
 
 Ship's 
 head. 
 
 - 89' ' - 40' 
 5 sinC CcosC 
 
 i 
 
 D sin 2 C E cos 2 C 
 
 Deviation.* 
 
 C-0 
 
 V 
 
 * 
 
 Comp'd. 
 
 Obs'd. 
 
 N. 
 
 00 - 40 
 
 00 - 4 
 
 - 44 
 
 - 42 
 
 - 2 
 
 4 
 
 NNE. 
 
 - 34 - 37 
 
 - 52 - 3 
 
 - 126 
 
 - 144 + 18 
 
 324 
 
 NE. 
 
 - 63 - 28 
 
 - 74 
 
 - 165 
 
 - 156 - 9 
 
 81 
 
 ENE. 
 
 - 82 
 
 - 15 
 
 - 52 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 146 
 
 - 127 
 
 - 19 
 
 361 
 
 E. 
 
 - 89 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 85 
 
 - 93 
 
 i + 8 
 
 64 
 
 ESE. 
 
 - 82 
 
 + 15 
 
 + 52 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 12 
 
 - 27 
 
 + 15 
 
 225 
 
 SE. 
 
 - 63 
 
 + 28 
 
 + 74 
 
 
 
 + 39 
 
 + 39 
 
 
 
 
 
 SSE. 
 
 - 34 
 
 + 37 
 
 + 52 
 
 - 3 i +52 
 
 + 64 
 
 - 12 
 
 144 
 
 S. 
 
 00 
 
 + 40 
 
 00 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 36 
 
 + 44 
 
 - 8 
 
 64 
 
 ssw. 
 
 + 34 
 
 + 37 
 
 - 52 
 
 - 3 
 
 + 16 
 
 + 8 
 
 + 8 
 
 64 
 
 sw. 
 
 + 63 
 
 + 28 
 
 - 74 
 
 +17+9 
 
 + 8 
 
 64 
 
 wsw. 
 
 + 82 
 
 + 15 
 
 - 52 
 
 + 3 +48 +47 
 
 + 1 
 
 1 
 
 w. 
 
 + 89 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 + 4 +93 +108 
 
 - 15 
 
 225 
 
 WNW. 
 
 + 82 
 
 - 15 
 
 + 52 
 
 '+ 3 
 
 + 122 + 110 
 
 + 12 
 
 144 
 
 NW. 
 
 + 63 
 
 - 28 
 
 + 74 
 
 
 
 + 109 +108 
 
 + 1 
 
 1 
 
 NNW. 
 
 + 34 
 
 - 37 
 
 + 52 
 
 -3+46 +53 
 
 - 7 
 
 49 
 
 1 J* 
 
 1815 
 
 Probable error of single observation, r= 8'. 
 For 16 points, r= 0.195 V^- For 8 points, 
 
 Before and after the sun observations the observing timepiece was 
 compared with the standard chronometer and its correction on local 
 apparent time computed as shown. The mean of the two compari- 
 sons gave the correction 1 1 m 58 s , and this was applied to the 
 recorded times of observation to get the local apparent times of 
 observation given in the second column of the form for " Computa- 
 tion of Compass Deviations." 
 
 Hydrographic Office Publication No. 71 gives the sun's azimuth 
 at 10-minute intervals between sunrise and sunset for each degree of 
 latitude from 61 N. to 61 S. and for each degree of declination of 
 the sun. As three interpolations are in general required to get a 
 desired azimuth, it expedites the computation of a series of observa- 
 tions to prepare from the azimuth tables an auxiliary table with 
 which only a single interpolation will be necessary. In the example 
 given the observations extended from 5 h 37 m to 6 h 47 m p. m., and 
 the following table was prepared to cover that period for latitude 
 38 20' X. and sun's decimation 22 14' X. 
 
94 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 Azimuth of the Sun on July 10, 1909. 
 
 Declination. 
 Latitude. 
 
 22 N. 
 38 N. 
 
 22 14' N. 
 38 N. 
 
 2214'N. ! 2214'N. 
 39 N. 38 20' 
 
 Change 
 permin. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 
 
 5 30 
 
 N. 76 30 W. 
 
 N. 76 18 W. 
 
 N. 76 38 W. N. 76 25 W. 
 
 
 40 
 
 75 07 
 
 74 55 
 
 75 13 75 01 
 
 8.4 
 
 50 
 
 73 44 
 
 73 32 
 
 73 48 73 37 
 
 8.4 
 
 600 
 
 72 20 
 
 7208 
 
 72 23 72 13 
 
 8.4 
 
 10 
 
 70 56 
 
 70 45 
 
 70 57 70 49 
 
 8.4 
 
 20 
 
 69 31 
 
 69 20 
 
 69 30 69 23 8. 6 
 
 30 
 
 68 06 
 
 6755 
 
 68 02 67 57 
 
 8.6 
 
 40 
 
 66 39 
 
 66 28 
 
 66 34 66 30 
 
 8.7 
 
 50 
 
 65 11 
 
 6500 
 
 65 04 65 01 
 
 8.9 
 
 A column has been added containing the values for latitude 28 
 N. and declination 22 N. taken directly from the azimuth tables. 
 A comparison of these values with the corresponding ones in column 5 
 shows differences changing gradually from 5' at the beginning to 
 10' at the end. From this it will be seen that the desired azimuths 
 may be obtained without the aid of an auxiliary table if the cor- 
 rections to the table for the nearest even degree of latitude and 
 declination be computed for the beginning and end of the series of 
 observations. As it is the usual practice to combine swings with port 
 and starboard helms, it will be sufficiently accurate for practical pur- 
 poses to determine the correction for the middle of each swing and 
 assume that it is constant throughout the swing. 
 
 The difference between the observed compass bearing of the sun 
 and its computed true bearing is the error of the compass for that 
 heading. By subtracting the mean compass error from the error 
 for each heading the corresponding deviations * (star deviations) are 
 found, provided observations have been made on each of 8 or 16 
 equidistant headings. It sometimes happens that the observation 
 on one heading is prevented by the mast or funnel coming in line 
 with the sun. In such case the missing compass error must be sup- 
 plied by interpolation before taking the mean. This can usually be 
 done with sufficient accuracy by comparison with the swing in the 
 opposite direction. If the observations on several headings have 
 been prevented by clouds, graphical interpolation should be resorted 
 to, plotting the observed compass errors and drawing a smooth curve 
 to represent them. 
 
 The analysis of the compass deviations * requires little explana- 
 tion, as the order of computation is indicated by the headings of the 
 form. For two headings and (180 -f) the observation equations 
 would be: 
 
DECLINATION. 95 
 
 Deviation * () = B sin + C cos + D sin 2+E cos 2 
 
 and 
 
 Deviation * (180 +) = - 5 sin - C cos +Z> sin 2 + # cos 2 
 Hence 
 
 Deviation * () - Deviation* (180 +C) = ^i = 2 . sin + 2 (7 cos 
 and 
 
 Deviation* () + Deviation* (180 +) = ^ 2 = 2 D sin 2 + 2 #cos 2 
 
 It will be seen that the quantities on the same line in columns 
 headed (1) and (2) are in each case the deviations * for two headings 
 180 apart, and hence the quantities in column (3) involve only the 
 factors D and E (quadrantal deviation) and those in column (4) 
 involve only B and C (semicircular deviation). 
 From observation equations of the form: 
 
 J x = 2 B sin + 2 C cos 
 
 the values of B and C are obtained by the method of least squares 
 from the normal equations : 
 
 IA^ sin = 2 B I sin 2 + 2 C I sin cos 
 I A cos = 2 B I sin cos + 2 C I cos 2 
 
 The values of sin and cos for angles corresponding to the equi- 
 distant headings N, NNE, ____ SSE, are given in columns (5) and 
 (6) . It will be seen that I sin 2 = 4, 1 sin cos = and 2 1 cos 2 = 4. 
 Hence for the case of observations on 16 equidistant headings the 
 normal equations become: 
 
 2Ai sin = 8 B ZA^ cos = 8 C 
 
 and the computation is made in the simple manner indicated on the 
 form. For observations on 8 equidistant headings only the values 
 of sin and cos given on the first, third, fifth, and seventh lines will 
 be involved and the normal equations will be: 
 
 ZA^ sin = 4 E ZA^ cos = 4 C 
 
 In the publication of the various Hydrographic Offices treating of 
 the compass and its deviations, tables are given to facilitate the com- 
 putation of AI sin and A^ cos , where the deviations are expressed 
 in degrees and minutes. For the small deviations involved in obser- 
 vations on the ships of the Coast and Geodetic Survey it will be 
 found convenient to convert the deviations* to minutes and use 
 Table XIII given at the end of this publication. 
 
 It has been shown above that the sum of the observation equa- 
 tions for two headings 180 apart would be: 
 
 J = 2 D sin 2 + 2 E cos 2 
 
96 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 For the two headings 90 from the first two the quantities in the 
 second member would be the same, but the signs would be changed. 
 The difference of the two equations would give: 
 
 J 3 = 4 D sin 2 + 4 E cos 2 
 
 The values of J 3 are given in the column headed (7), obtained from 
 column (3) in the manner indicated. The corresponding normal 
 equations are: 
 
 JJ 3 sin2 = 8# and JJ 3 cos 2 = 8 E 
 for observations on 16 headings, 
 and I J 3 sin 2 = 4 D and I J 3 cos 2 = 4 E 
 
 for observations on 8 headings. The quantities in columns (8) and 
 (9) are the shies and cosines of 0, 45, 90, and 135, respectively. 
 The analysis of the observations in the example gives: 
 
 Deviation *= -89' sin - 40' cos -.74' sin 2-4' cos 2r 
 
 from which the deviation * on any heading, , can be computed. As 
 a test of the accuracy of the observations a comparison should be 
 made between the deviations * derived from the observations and 
 those computed from the formula. For observations on 16 headings 
 the probable error of a single observation (mean of swings) is given 
 by the formula: 
 
 Vlv 2 
 1( ._ 4 = 0.195^V 
 
 Where observations are made on only 8 headings, 
 
 rw 
 
 = 0.6745^ 8 4 = 0.337 V- '" 
 
 In the example r= 8'. For observations under i'a vorable condi- 
 tions that represents about an average value. 
 
 For navigational purposes the complete deviations are required. 
 They may be obtained by adding the constant part of the deviation, 
 A, to the deviations.* As already pointed out, A is determined from 
 swings near shore where the declination is known at least approxi- 
 mately. As the declination where the ship is swung is in general 
 not exactly the same as at the point on shore where observations are 
 made, it is desirable to combine the results obtained at a number 
 of places to get a mean value of A. While this constant part of the 
 compass deviation is no doubt partly due to unsymmetrical distri- 
 bution of the ship magnetism with respect to the compass, the greater 
 part is to be ascribed to imperfections in the compass and the azimuth 
 circle, corresponding to an index error. 
 
DIP AND TOTAL INTENSITY. 97 
 
 Since the deviation is the resultant effect of the forces exerted on 
 the compass needle by the ship's magnetism and the earth's mag- 
 netism, it follows that any change in the ratio of those two forces 
 will produce a change in the deviation. The quadrantal deviation 
 is due to the magnetism induced in horizontal soft iron and therefore 
 varies directly as H varies, and for a particular heading the ratio of 
 the two does not change when the ship goes from place to place. 
 Hence the coefficients D and E should be constant. 
 
 The semicircular deviation is due partly to the subpermanent mag- 
 netism of the ship and partly to induced magnetism in vertical soft 
 iron. The former is constant, or nearly so, and therefore produces an 
 effect on the compass needle which is inversely proportional to H. 
 The induced magnetism in vertical sof^ iron is proportional to the 
 vertical force or H tan 7, and its effect on the compass needle is there- 
 fore proportional to tan 7. As H decreases and 7 increases in going 
 from the magnetic equator to the magnetic poles, it follows that in the 
 northern hemisphere B and C should become greater as the ship goes 
 farther north and vice versa. 
 
 DIP AND TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 On several of the ships of the Coast and Geodetic Survey dip and 
 total intensity are determined by means of a Lloyd-Creak dip circle 
 mounted on a gimbal stand as shown in Figure 9. The balance of the 
 instrument is secured by a counter-poise at the back, and its stability 
 is regulated by a heavy ball threaded onto a rod extending below 
 the gimbal rings. The instrument is leveled in the same manner as 
 when mounted on a tripod on land. 
 
 Experience with the original form of Lloyd-Creak dip circle showed 
 that within 30 or 40 of the magnetic equator it was impossible to 
 observe deflections, as the earth's total intensity became too small to 
 offer sufficient resistance to the force exerted by the deflecting needle, 
 and the suspended needle would not come to rest at right angles to 
 the deflector. To remedy this defect several dip circles of this type 
 have been modified in the instrument shop of the Coast and Geodetic 
 Survey so as to increase the distance between the two needles when 
 making deflection observations. The loaded needle, when in use as a 
 deflector, is mounted in an aluminum case which fits in a frame 
 between the reading microscopes, as shown in Figure 9. The needle is 
 mounted to one side of the center of the case, so that the deflections 
 may be made at two deflection distances by reversing the position of 
 the case in its supporting frame. Originally the needles were 7.3 cm. 
 apart during deflections. With the new arrangement the distances 
 are 7.9 and 9.4 cm., respectively, and it is possible to observe, at least 
 at the longer distance, in any part of the globe. In the instrument 
 7721311 7 
 
98 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 shown in the figure a small telescope was added, so that astronomical 
 observations on land can be made if desired. 
 
 Dip observations may be made with the regular dip needles in the 
 same manner and with nearly the same facility as on land. The only 
 difference is that the ivory scraper must be used continuously, and 
 when the needle swings through a large arc on account of the motion 
 of the ship, the extremes of the swing must be read and recorded 
 instead of attempting to estimate the middle. As it is usual to make 
 observations on 8 or 16 equidistant headings in order to eliminate 
 the varying effect of the ship's magnetism, a complete determination 
 of dip and intensity on each heading would require too much time, 
 
 FIG. 9. Lloyd-Creak pattern dip circle. 
 
 and the following scheme of observations has been adopted with 
 satisfactory results. 
 
 (1) Deflection observations are made while swinging ship in one 
 direction and dip with loaded needle while swinging in the opposite 
 direction. The combination of these observations will give a value of 
 total intensity for each heading, and from each observation of deflec- 
 tions a value of dip may be obtained, as explained on page 83. 
 
 (2) On each heading observations are made in only one position of 
 needle and circle, so as to require not much more time than the com- 
 pass observations, which are usually going on at the same time. As 
 the gimbal stand is set so that when the horizontal circle of the dip 
 circle reads zero the needle swings in the plane of the fore-and-aft line 
 
DIP AND TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 99 
 
 of the ship, the instrument may be placed in the magnetic meridian 
 with sufficient accuracy by means of the heading of the ship as shown 
 by the standard compass. For observations on 16 headings the 
 arrangement would be as follows: 
 
 Heading. 
 
 Needle face. 
 
 Ver. circle. 
 
 HOT. circle 
 setting. 
 
 N. 
 
 E. 
 
 E. 
 
 36000 
 
 NNE. 
 
 E. 
 
 E. 
 
 337 30 
 
 NE. 
 
 E. 
 
 E. 
 
 315 00 
 
 ENE. 
 
 E. 
 
 E. 
 
 292 30 
 
 E. 
 
 W. 
 
 W. 
 
 90 00 
 
 ESE. 
 
 W. 
 
 W. 
 
 67 30 
 
 SE. 
 
 W. 
 
 W. 
 
 45 00 
 
 SSE. 
 
 w. 
 
 w. 
 
 2230 
 
 S. 
 
 E. 
 
 w. 
 
 36000 
 
 SSW. 
 
 E. 
 
 w. 
 
 337 30 
 
 sw. 
 
 E. 
 
 w. 
 
 315 00 
 
 wsw. 
 
 E. 
 
 w. 
 
 292 30 
 
 w. 
 
 W. 
 
 E. 
 
 90 00 
 
 WNW. 
 
 W. 
 
 E. 
 
 67 30 
 
 NW. 
 
 W. 
 
 E. 
 
 45 00 
 
 NNW. 
 
 w. 
 
 E. 
 
 2230 
 
 (3) Two readings of each end of the needle are made for each 
 position. In case the needle is so nearly horizontal that only one end 
 can be read, four readings are made of that end. 
 
 (4) The times of beginning and ending of observations for each 
 group of four headings and the corresponding temperatures are 
 recorded, also conditions of weather, sea, etc. 
 
 The variation in the values of 7, 7', and u for the four different 
 positions of circle and needle can be determined from the shore obser- 
 vations, and the values obtained on shipboard should be corrected 
 accordingly to reduce to the mean of the four positions, in case the 
 corrections amount to as much as 10 '; in any case the values of dip 
 must be corrected to reduce to the standard dip instrument. Sample 
 observations of the two classes and the corresponding computations, 
 and a summary of the results of a complete swing, are given below. 
 
100 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 Form 391. 
 
 MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS ON BOARD C. AND G. S. S. BACHE. 
 LOADED DIP FOR TOTAL INTENSITY. 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. Latitude, 38 20'. Longitude, 76 22'. 
 Dip circle No. 35. Needle No. 4. 
 
 Weight No. 6. 
 
 Ship's head N. 
 Hor. circle 360. 
 Ver. circle E. 
 Needle face E. 
 
 Ship's head NNE. 
 Hor. circle 337*- 
 Ver. circle E. 
 Needle face E. 
 
 Ship's head NE. 
 Hor. circle 315. 
 Ver. circle E. 
 Needle face E. 
 
 Ship's head ENE. 
 Hor. circle 292* . 
 Ver. circle E. 
 Needle face E. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 8. 
 
 N. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 345 00 
 344 10 
 
 164 40 
 164 30 
 
 346 20 
 34600 
 
 166 00 
 166 10 
 
 348 50 
 348 10 
 
 168 40 
 16830 
 
 350 50 
 351 00 
 
 170 30 
 170 50 
 
 34435 
 
 16435 
 
 346 10 
 
 16605 
 
 348 30 
 
 68 35 
 
 350 55 
 
 170 40 
 
 /' -15 25 
 
 -13 52 
 
 -11 28 
 
 -9 12 
 
 Form 390. 
 
 MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS ON BOARD C. AND G. S. S. BACHE. 
 
 DEFLECTIONS FOR TOTAL INTENSITY AND DIP. 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. Latitude, 38 20'. Longitude, 76 22'. 
 
 Dip circle No. 35. Needle No. 4 deflecting, No. 3 suspended. 
 
 Ship's head NE. Hor. circle 315. 
 Ver. circle E. Needle face E. 
 
 Ship's head NNE. Hor. circle 337*. 
 Ver. circle E. Needle face E. 
 
 D. 
 
 R. 
 
 R. 
 
 D. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 N. 
 
 S. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 228 40 
 30 
 
 48 20 
 30 
 
 285 10 
 20 
 
 105 20 
 20 
 
 287 10 
 20 
 
 107 30 
 40 
 
 J_".* 4U 
 40 
 
 4950 
 50 
 
 228 35 
 
 48 25 
 
 285 15 
 
 105 20 
 
 287 15 
 
 107 35 
 
 229 40 
 
 49 50 
 
 48 30 
 153 47.5 
 I 76 54 
 
 105 17.5 
 56 47.5 
 u 28 24 
 
 107 25 
 157 10 
 / 78 35 
 
 49 45 
 57 40 
 u 28 50 
 
DIP AND TOTAL INTENSITY/ 
 
 Form 392. 
 
 COMPUTATION OF TOTAL INTENSITY*. 
 
 From observations on board C. and G. S. S. Bache. 
 Formulas: u'=II' and F= cVcos /'. cscTwTcsc u' 
 
 Date, July 10, 1909. 
 
 Computer, H. M. Armstrong 
 
 Ship's head. 
 
 N. 
 
 NNE. 
 
 NE. 
 
 ENE. 
 
 
 , 
 
 / 
 
 o / 
 
 / 
 
 r 
 
 -15 25 
 
 -13 52 
 
 -11 28 
 
 - 9 12 
 
 u 
 
 29 03 
 
 28 59 
 
 2833 
 
 27 49 
 
 u' 
 
 94 16 
 
 92 04 
 
 87 59 
 
 83 39 
 
 log cos /' 
 
 9. 98409 
 
 9. 98715 
 
 9. 99124 
 
 9. 99438 
 
 " cscw 
 
 0. 31375 
 
 0.31466 
 
 0.32064 
 
 0. 33101 
 
 " csc u' 
 
 0. 00121 
 
 0. 00028 
 
 0. 00027 
 
 0. 00267 
 
 Sum 
 
 0. 29905 
 
 0. 30209 
 
 0.31215 
 
 0. 32806 
 
 Half sum 
 
 0. 14952 
 
 0. 15104 
 
 0. 15608 
 
 0. 16403 
 
 log C 
 
 9. 62425 
 
 9.62425 
 
 9.62425 
 
 9.62425 
 
 p 
 
 9. 77377 
 
 9. 77529 
 
 9. 78033 
 
 9.78828 
 
 F 
 
 .5940 
 
 .5961 
 
 .6030 
 
 .6142 
 
 SUMMARY OF RESULTS. 
 Steamer Sache, July 10, 1909. 
 
 Head. 
 
 7 obs'd. 
 
 /corr'd. 
 
 /' 
 
 u obs'd. 
 
 u corr'd. 
 
 u' 
 
 F 
 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 / 
 
 o / 
 
 / 
 
 C, G. S. 
 
 N. 
 
 79 14 
 
 78 51 
 
 -15 25 
 
 28 54 
 
 29 03 
 
 94 16 
 
 0. 5940 
 
 NNE. 
 
 78 35 
 
 78 12 
 
 -13 52 
 
 28 50 
 
 28 59 
 
 92 04 
 
 .5961 
 
 NE. 
 
 76 54 
 
 76 31 
 
 -11 28 
 
 28 24 
 
 28 33 
 
 87 59 
 
 .6030 
 
 ENE. 
 
 74 50 
 
 74 27 
 
 - 9 12 
 
 27 40 
 
 27 49 
 
 83 39 
 
 .6142 
 
 E. 
 
 71 01 
 
 71 42 
 
 - 5 20 
 
 27 24 
 
 27 32 
 
 77 02 
 
 .6258 
 
 ESE. 
 
 68 11 
 
 68 52 
 
 - 2 42 
 
 26 19 
 
 26 27 
 
 71 32 
 
 .6473 
 
 SE. 
 
 65 52 
 
 66 33 
 
 - 58 
 
 25 28 
 
 25 36 
 
 67 31 
 
 .6662 
 
 SSE. 
 
 64 21 
 
 65 02 
 
 00 
 
 25 04 
 
 25 12 
 
 65 02 
 
 .6776 
 
 S. 
 
 64 48 
 
 64 29 
 
 + 18 
 
 25 00 
 
 2450 
 
 64 11 
 
 .6846 
 
 SSW. 
 
 65 50 
 
 65 31 
 
 + 02 
 
 25 20 
 
 25 10 
 
 65 29 
 
 .6768 
 
 sw. 
 
 68 18 
 
 67 59 
 
 - 48 
 
 26 02 
 
 25 52 ; 68 47 
 
 .6601 
 
 wsw. 
 
 71 28 
 
 71 09 
 
 - 2 40 
 
 26 42 
 
 26 32 i 73 49 
 
 .6424 
 
 w. 
 
 74 09 
 
 74 43 
 
 - 4 55 
 
 27 56 
 
 27 49 
 
 7938 
 
 .6202 
 
 WNW. 
 
 76 41 
 
 77 15 
 
 - 9 12 
 
 28 34 
 
 28 27 
 
 86 27 
 
 .6066 
 
 NW. 
 
 78 15 
 
 78 49 
 
 -13 02 
 
 28 55 
 
 28 48 I 91 51 
 
 .5988 
 
 NNW. 
 
 78 49 
 
 79 23 
 
 -15 05 
 
 2904 
 
 28 57 94 28 
 
 .5955 
 
 Mean. 
 
 72 20 
 
 72 28 
 
 - 6 31 
 
 27 14 
 
 27 14 
 
 7859 
 
 .6318 
 
 In the case of this dip circle, No. 35, it was found necessary to apply 
 the following corrections to 7 and u on the basis of the results of 
 
 observations at several shore stations : 
 
 / ' u 
 
 Circle east, needle face east 23' + 9' 
 
 Circle west, needle face west +41 + 8 
 
 Circle west, needle face east 19 10 
 
 Circle east, needle face west , +34 - 7 
 
102 OWRfjCJrfGSfcS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 the values of dip and total intensity show 
 a large range in the course of the swing. It will be found also by com- 
 parison with shore observations in the vicinity that the mean values 
 of dip and intensity on board differ by considerable amounts from the 
 shore results. These differences do not remain constant, however, 
 when the ship goes from place to place. The deviations in dip and 
 total intensity may be derived and analyzed in a manner similar to 
 that given for the compass deviations. As it is seldom, however, 
 that dip-circle observations are made at sea except when swinging ship , 
 it is usually sufficient to obtain by interpolation from the swings near 
 shore the corrections required by the mean values of dip and total 
 intensity for the swings at sea. 
 
 For the limited range of dip usually covered in a season's work and 
 with swings near shore in the highest and lowest latitudes reached, a 
 satisfactory approximation is obtained by assuming that the changes 
 in the corrections are proportional to the changes in dip. 
 
 SPECIAL DIRECTIONS. 
 
 In order to obtain the best results from observations on shipboard 
 especial attention should be paid to the following points: 
 
 (1) Avoid as far as possible any change in the condition of the intensity 
 needles. Keep them clean and free from rust and take especial care to 
 protect the pivots from injury. When removing a needle after observing 
 be sure that the point does not catch on the edge of the graduated circle. 
 
 (2) Have the ship as nearly as possible in the same condition as regards 
 location of boats, anchors, chains, etc., for the swings near shore as for 
 those at sea. 
 
 (3) Make the compass observations when the sun is not more than 30 
 high, if possible. Steady the ship on a heading for a minute or two before 
 reading the sun's bearing. In handling the azimuth circle, be careful to 
 have the compass bowl swinging free at the moment of observation. 
 
 (4) When there is much motion to the ship, select a moment for talcing 
 a reading when she is nearly on an even keel. In the case of the dip 
 circle, select a vibration of the needle which appears symmetrical. 
 
DIRECTIONS FOR OPERATING A MAGNETIC OBSERVATORY. 
 
 BUILDINGS. 
 
 For the operation of a magnetic observatory there are required a 
 variation building in which the variation instruments are mounted, 
 and an absolute building in which the absolute observations are made. 
 In their construction scrupulous care is exercised to exclude all 
 material that might possibly affect the magnets, and in their subse- 
 quent use the same care must be exercised. No article of magnetic 
 material should be carried into the buildings unless absolutely 
 needed, and no person should be allowed to enter the variation build- 
 ing until he has divested himself of all such articles, as knife, watch, 
 keys, etc. The sole of a shoe or the brim of a hat often contains a 
 piece of stsel sufficient to disturb the sensitive variation instruments. 
 Such other buildings as may be needed are usually placed far enough 
 away to have no effect on the magnets. The variation building is 
 designed with a view to reduce to a small limit the range of temper- 
 ature inside. Those of the Coast and Geodetic Survey are all above 
 ground and built of wood, the amount of insulation varying with the 
 range of temperature to be overcome. 
 
 VARIATION INSTRUMENTS. 
 
 The variations in declination, horizontal intensity, and vertical 
 intensity are recorded photographically by means of a magneto- 
 graph, consisting of a recording apparatus and three variometers. 
 Light from a lamp is reflected from a mirror attached to the magnet 
 of a variometer and traces an irregular line (curve) on a sheet of 
 photographic paper (magnet ogram) wrapped around a revolving 
 drum of the recording apparatus. The reflection from a fixed 
 mirror traces a straight line (base line) on the magnetogram, and the 
 variation in the distance between the curve and the base line (ordi- 
 nate) is a measure of the variation in the direction of the suspended 
 magnet produced by the variation in the earth's magnetism. 
 
 The D variometer is mounted with its magnet in the magnetic 
 meridian and the direction of the magnet changes as the magnetic 
 declination changes. In the H variometer the magnet is suspended 
 in the magnetic prime vertical and a change in its direction corre- 
 sponds to a change in the horizontal intensity. In the Z variometer 
 the magnet rotatss about a horizontal axis, like a dip needle, but is 
 adjusted to lie approximately in the horizontal plane, so that a 
 
 103 
 
104 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 variation in its inclination to the horizon corresponds to a variation 
 in the vertical intensity. 
 
 Each of the five observatories of the Coast and Geodetic Survey is 
 equipped with a magnet ograph of the Eschenhagen type, in which 
 very small magnets ar3 used, so that it is possible to have the vari- 
 ometers quite near to each other without appreciable interaction. 
 They are mounted in a row, magnetically east and west, as shown in 
 Figure 10, and all three record on the same magnetogram, the up and 
 down motion of the Z magnet being converted to horizontal motion 
 on the magnetogram by means of a prism. There is also a thermo- 
 graph attached to the vertical intensity variometer, which records 
 photographically the variations of temperature. 
 
 When the D variometer is east of the recording apparatus, a 
 motion of the north end of the magnet to the east (increasing decli- 
 nation) causes the registering spot of light to move to the north on 
 the recording drum. When it is west of the recording apparatus 
 the motion of the spot of light is toward the south. In the case of 
 the horizontal intensity variometer, when the north end of the 
 
 Magnetic Prime Vertical 
 
 FIG. 10. Relative position of variometers. 
 
 e 
 
 magnet points toward the recording apparatus, an increase of hori- 
 zontal intensity causes the spot of light to move toward the north on 
 the drum, no matter whether the magnet is east or west of the 
 recording apparatus. The vertical intensity variometer is mounted 
 with the north end of the magnet to the north, and an increase of 
 vertical intensity causes the spot of light to move toward the south 
 on the drum. In the D and H variometers the magnet is suspended 
 by means of a quartz fiber. To the lower end of the fiber is attached 
 a light frame supporting two mirrors, the vertical plane surfaces of 
 which make a slight angle with each other. They must be so 
 adjusted that the distance between the two reflected rays of light, 
 where they strike the recording cylinder, is slightly less than the 
 width of the magnetogram. The magnet hangs in a stirrup attached 
 to the lower part of the mirror frame and is inclosed by a cylindrical 
 copper damping box. As the diameter of the box is only slightly 
 greater than the length of the magnet and as the hole in the top is 
 not much larger than the shank of the stirrup, it is necessary in 
 adjusting the instrument to see that the shank is centered in the hole 
 in order to insure freedom of motion of the magnet, and the observer 
 
VARIATION INSTRUMENTS. 105 
 
 should examine the variometers- from time to time to be sure that no 
 change of level has occurred. The moment of inertia of the magnet 
 system is so small that only a very small resistance is required to 
 appreciably affect the motion of the magnet. An accumulation of 
 mold or dust, or the web of a minute spider, such as occasionally 
 finds its way through the openings of the variometer, is often suffi- 
 cient. The appearance of the curve will usually indicate the pres- 
 ence of an obstruction, and it may be necessary to remove the damp- 
 ing boxes and clean them unless it is found that change of level 
 eliminates the trouble. It sometimes happens that a gradual slip- 
 ping of the joint between fiber and mirror frame causes a lowering of 
 the magnet in its damping box until it finally touches the bottom. 
 
 The magnet of the H variometer is held in its position at right 
 angles to the magnetic meridian principally by the torsion of the 
 supporting fiber, but partly also by control magnets placed below 
 the suspended magnet with their axes horizontal. Their primary 
 object, however, is to regulate the sensitiveness of the variometer. 
 
 In the Z variometer there are two magnets supported by a light 
 frame, like the beam of a balance, on the under side of which are 
 two conical steel points which rest in cup-shaped depressions in 
 agate surfaces. The steel points are so adjusted that the line joining 
 them is at right angles to the magnetic axis of the magnet system. 
 The horizontality of the magnet is secured partly by an adjustable 
 weight threaded onto a horizontal rod, and partly by a control 
 magnet directly under the center of the magnet, which partly coun- 
 teracts the effect of Z. The stability is regulated by a weight 
 threaded onto a vertical rod, so that the center of gravity of the 
 magnet system may be raised or lowered, as desired. Great care 
 must be exercised in working about this variometer, as a slight jar is 
 sometimes sufficient to change the balance of the magnet systsm or 
 even throw it out of balance altogether. This applies especially to 
 the deflection observations for the determination of scale value. 
 When the magnet system has become displaced by a jar or by an 
 unusually large deflection, as during a magnetic storm, it may gen- 
 erally be put back in adjustment by lifting and lowering two or 
 three times by means of the lifter. If further adjustment is required, 
 it can usually be done by raising or lowering the control magnet, 
 unless a change of sensitiveness is required. 
 
 Under unfavorable conditions the steel bearing points may become 
 rusted or otherwise blunted, in which case the magnet system will not 
 move freely and the curve will appear abnormally smooth. Extra 
 bearing points are provided for replacing those which may become 
 defective. 
 
 The distance between the D and Z variometers is so short that a 
 change in the position of the Z control magnet produces a slight 
 
106 DIRECTIONS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 change in the position of the D magnet, and the amount of this change 
 must be determined when the Z variometer is readjusted. 
 
 The thermograph consists of a Bourdon tube filled with mercury, 
 to the free end of which is attached a mirror. 
 
 The drum of the recording apparatus is usually made to revolve 
 once in 24 hours. At hourly intervals a system of shutters is raised 
 to a vertical position by means of a cam attached to a gear wheel and 
 after the lapse of a minute or two allowed to drop back into a hori- 
 zontal position. The shutters are so adjusted that when raised they 
 prevent the light from the fixed mirrors reaching the magnetogram 
 and thus produce a short break in each base line. 
 
 By a change of gearing the drum may be made to revolve once in 
 two hours and the time breaks then occur every five minutes. It is 
 then necessary to open wider the slit of the lamp, in order to secure 
 sharp lines on the photographic paper. 
 
 CONVERSION TO ABSOLUTE VALUES. 
 
 In order to determine the absolute value of D, H, or Z at any 
 moment from the continuous photographic record of the variometer 
 it is necessary to know: (1) The base-line value, that is, the absolute 
 value when the curve and base line coincide; (2) the scale value, or 
 value of 1 millimeter of ordinate expressed in absolute units (minutes 
 for D, gammas or units of the fifth decimal in the C. G. S. system 
 for H and Z) ; (3) in the case of H and Z, the temperature coefficient, 
 or the effect upon the ordinate of a change of 1 in temperature. 
 
 In the H variometer, the position of the magnet is the resultant 
 effect of the force of torsion, the force acting between the suspended 
 magnet and the control magnets, and the force exerted upon the 
 suspended magnet by the horizontal component of the earth's field. 
 A change in the magnetic moment of the suspended magnet due to 
 change of temperature will change the magnetic force acting and hence 
 change the position of equilibrium, irrespective of any change in H. 
 
 Similar conditions exist in the Z variometer and in addition the 
 moment of the balancing weight changes with temperature on account 
 of change in the length of the supporting rod. 
 
 Let d, 7i, 2 = the ordinates in millimeters at the temperature t, in- 
 creasing ordinate corresponding to increasing D, H, and Z, 
 
 d, h, z = scale values of D, H, and Z, respectively, 
 
 B d , B h , B z = base-line values for D, H, and Z (in the case of H and 
 Z, reduced to a standard temperature t , 
 
 q h and q z = temperature coefficients of the H and Z variometers, 
 
 Then 
 
 D = B d +d.e d 
 
 H = B h +Ji.e h +q h (t-t ) 
 
CONVERSION TO ABSOLUTE VALUES. 107 
 
 BASE-LINE VALUES. 
 
 For the determination of the base-line values absolute observations 
 are made at least once a week. From an inspection of the above for- 
 mulas it will be seen that if the ordinates d, h, z be read for the times 
 at which absolute observations have been made, the base-line values 
 may be computed, provided the scale values and temperature coeffi- 
 cients are known. The absolute value of vertical intensity must be 
 computed, however, from the observed values of H and I. It is in 
 general not feasible to make simultaneous observations of H and 1, 
 but the value of H at the time of the dip observations may be deter- 
 mined from the record of the variometer after the H base-line value 
 has been computed. 
 
 The absolute observations are made in the manner already ex- 
 plained, but greater care must be exercised in the operations and a 
 greater degree of accuracy is to be expected than is the case in work 
 in the field. Absolute accuracy is impossible, however, and the base- 
 line values resulting from a series of observations will show more or 
 less variation, whereas they should be constant provided there has 
 been no change in the adjustment of the variometers. It has been 
 found in some cases that even when there has been no readjustment 
 of the variometer the base-line values show a progressive change. 
 This may be due partly to gradual change of the relative positions of 
 suspension fiber and stirrup, partly to the fact that the magnets suffer 
 gradual loss of magnetism with age and, in the case of H and Z where 
 the range of temperature has been large, partly to error in the adopted 
 value of temperature coefficient. It is possible also that the torsion 
 of the quartz fibers may change somewhat with age. Hence in deter- 
 mining what base-line values to adopt it is necessary to adjust the 
 observed values, having due regard to this progressive change. For 
 any particular set of instruments it must be found out by experience 
 how closely the adopted values should correspond to those resulting 
 from observation. In the case of D and H the mean of the values 
 determined in the course of a month is usually almost free of error of 
 observation and may be used as a basis for determining the gradual 
 change from month to month. In the case of Z the error of observa- 
 tion is somewhat greater. An abrupt and continued change in the 
 base-line values when there has been no readjustment of the vario- 
 meter would demand a careful examination of the absolute instru- 
 ment to make sure that there is no systematic error in the absolute 
 observations due to lack of adjustment. It is desirable to make 
 absolute observations at different times of the day, so that the com- 
 putation of base-line values will involve ordinates of different amounts. 
 The form of computation of H and Z base-line values is shown in the 
 following examples, in which the adopted standard temperature is 
 10 C. 
 
 m 
 
108 
 
 Form 358. 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOB MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 HORIZONTAL INTENSITY BASE LINE. 
 
 Sitka, Alaska. Magnetic Observatory. 
 Magnetograph No. 6. 
 
 Magnetometer No. 37. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Feb. 5. Feb. 11. 
 
 Feb. 17. 
 
 Feb. 20. 
 
 1908. L. M. T. Scaling. L. M. T. 
 
 Scaling. L. M. T. 
 
 Scaling. 
 
 L. M. T. 
 
 Scaling. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 mm. h. m. 
 
 mm. h. m. 
 
 mm. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 mm. 
 
 10 21 73. 4 14 40 
 
 71.7 917 
 
 73.6 
 
 1005 
 
 68.3 
 
 Oscillations. 
 
 24 
 26 
 
 79.4 
 74.4 
 
 43 
 46 
 
 69.3 
 66.7 
 
 20 
 22 
 
 73.7 
 73.6 
 
 08 
 10 
 
 68.1 
 67.7 
 
 
 29 
 
 76.6 
 
 48 
 
 67.5 25 
 
 73.4 
 
 13 
 
 67.4 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 41 
 
 73. 8 15 00 
 
 68.3 9 36 
 
 72.0 
 
 10 28 
 
 66.5 
 
 Deflections. 
 
 47 
 52 
 
 74.4 
 74.4 
 
 06 
 11 
 
 68.9 41 
 69.3 46 
 
 71.4 
 71.4 
 
 33 
 39 
 
 67.6 
 66.0 
 
 58 
 
 72.7 
 
 17 
 
 69.6 
 
 51 
 
 71.3 
 
 44 
 
 65.4 
 
 I 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 07 
 
 72.9 
 
 15 21 
 
 70.3 
 
 956 
 
 71.2 
 
 1048 
 
 65.3 
 
 Deflections. 
 
 71.8 
 71.6 
 
 26 
 32 
 
 70. 1 10 01 
 70.1 06 
 
 70.1 
 69.8 
 
 53 
 
 58 
 
 64.9 
 64.6 
 
 
 22 
 
 69.4 
 
 37 
 
 69.1 
 
 11 
 
 69.4 
 
 11 04 
 
 ;-}. :, 
 
 
 11 29 
 
 65.3 
 
 15 45 
 
 69.5 
 
 10 19 
 
 68.3 
 
 11 12 
 
 63.5 
 
 Oscillations. 
 
 32 
 34 
 
 63.3 
 61.3 
 
 4X 
 50 
 
 69.3 
 70.0 
 
 21 
 24 
 
 68.5 
 68.7 
 
 15 
 18 
 
 63.5 
 63.4 
 
 
 37 
 
 59.3 
 
 53 
 
 69.5 
 
 27 
 
 68.6 
 
 20 
 
 63.4 
 
 Mean 
 
 
 70.9 
 
 
 69.3 
 
 
 70.9 
 
 
 65.6 
 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 r 
 
 
 r 
 
 c* 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 * and At 
 
 3. 7 
 
 196 
 
 5. 9 
 
 193 
 
 5. 7 
 
 198 
 
 6. 5 
 
 183 
 
 4 
 
 
 -46 
 
 
 -30 
 
 
 -31 
 
 
 -26 
 
 ft, 
 
 
 152 
 
 
 163 
 
 
 167 
 
 
 157 
 
 H 
 
 15536 
 
 15552 
 
 15555 
 
 15537 
 
 Base line 
 
 15384 
 
 15389 
 
 15388 
 
 15380 
 
CONVERSION TO ABSOLUTE VALUES. 
 
 109 
 
 Form 359. 
 
 Sitka Magnetic Observatory. 
 Magnetograph No. 6. 
 
 VERTICAL INTENSITY BASE LINE. 
 
 Earth inductor No. 2. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Feb. 5. 
 
 Feb. 11. 
 
 1908. 
 
 Local 
 mean time. 
 
 Scalings. 
 
 Local 
 mean time. 
 
 Scalings. 
 
 H. 
 
 Z. 
 
 H. 
 
 Z. 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 h. m. 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 9 29 
 
 77.2 
 
 -88.1 
 
 16 25 
 
 71.3 
 
 -80.6 
 
 
 31 
 
 77.6 
 
 88.1 
 
 27 
 
 70.7 
 
 80.9 
 
 
 34 
 
 77.4 
 
 87.7 
 
 30 
 
 72.1 
 
 81.2 
 
 
 36 
 
 77.4 
 
 87.5 
 
 32 
 
 71.3 
 
 81.3 
 
 
 39 
 
 79.4 
 
 87.4 
 
 34 
 
 72.8 
 
 80.7 
 
 
 41 
 
 79.4 
 
 87.3 
 
 36 
 
 73.3 
 
 80.5 
 
 
 44 
 
 78.2 
 
 86.7 
 
 39 
 
 73.3 
 
 80.6 
 
 Means 
 
 (i-T.ar) 
 
 78.1 
 
 -87.5 
 
 
 72.1 
 
 -80.8 
 
 Sh and Z 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 4.69 
 
 
 2.79 
 
 4.69 
 
 t and h t 
 
 3.8 
 
 r 
 218 
 
 5.9 
 
 r 
 201 
 
 At and Ah 
 
 6.2 
 
 -45 
 
 4.1 
 
 -30 
 
 h 
 
 
 173 
 
 
 171 
 
 H base line 
 
 at 10 
 
 15386 
 
 
 15386 
 
 H 
 
 15559 
 
 
 15557 
 
 I 
 
 74 36'. 4 
 
 
 74 37'. 
 
 logH 
 log tan 7 
 
 
 4. 19198 
 0. 56016 
 
 
 4. 19193 
 0. 56046 
 
 logZ 
 
 4. 75214 
 
 
 4. 75239 
 
 Z 
 
 (J l.Or) r 
 56512 
 
 o 
 
 r 
 56544 
 
 t and 2< 
 
 3.8 -410 
 
 5.9 
 
 -379 
 
 J and Az 
 
 6.2 +6 
 
 4.1 
 
 + 4 
 
 2 
 
 
 -404 
 
 
 -375 
 
 Z base line 
 
 at 10 56916 
 
 
 56919 
 
 SCALE VALUES. 
 
 From the formulas on page 106 it would appear that the scale 
 value of a variometer might be determined by making absolute 
 observations at different times and comparing the change in the 
 observed values with the change in ordinate. In practice, however, 
 the uncertainty in the absolute observations is generally too great 
 to secure satisfactory results in this way. 
 
 The scale value of the D variometer depends directly upon the dis- 
 tance between the movable mirror of the magnet and the paper on 
 the drum, and is found by the formula 
 
 ctnl 
 
110 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 in which d is the angular motion of the magnet corresponding to 1 mm 
 on the magnetogram, R is the distance from the magnetogram to 
 the face of the movable mirror increased by two-thirds the thickness 
 of the mirror, and li is the angle through which the magnet is turned 
 when the torsion head is turned through the angle/. The lens of 
 the Eschenhagen D variometer is usually focussed for a scale value 
 of 1 mm. = 1'. For this convenient scale value 
 
 mm 
 
 #=1718.c 
 
 There is so little variation in the torsion of a quartz fiber that after 
 its torsion factor has once been determined it is unnecessary to 
 repeat the operation, although it is usual to do so from time to time 
 as a check. When a new fiber is inserted, a determination of its 
 torsion factor is of course required. 
 
 In the case of the H variometer, the scale value depends upon the 
 rigidity with which the magnet is held in its position at right angles 
 to the magnetic meridian. In the older form of suspension (bi-lilar) 
 the desired sensitiveness is secured by varying the distance between 
 the upper ends of the two supporting fibers. Where quartz fiber 
 suspension is used, it is not practicable to regulate the sensitiveness 
 by the size of the fiber, but the desired result is obtained by means 
 of control magnets, which serve to increase or decrease the force to 
 be balanced by the torsion of the fiber. 
 
 The scale value is found by comparing the amounts by which an 
 auxiliary magnet deflects the magnets of the D and H variometers,; 
 when similarly placed with regard to them. The series of observa- 
 tions is begun by deflecting the D magnet by placing the deflector to 
 the east and west (in the magnetic prime vertical), north end east or 
 west. Then the H magnet is deflected by placing the deflector to the 
 north and south, north end north or south. This is followed by a 
 second set of D deflections. Unless the torsion of the D fiber is 
 known from previous observations, a set of observations to deter- 
 mine that factor is also require^. It is important to make deflec- 
 tions at two distances as a check on the accuracy of the work. 
 Such distances should be selected as will give deflections of consider- 
 able magnitude without throwing the spot of light beyond the limits 
 of the magnetogram. Care must be taken to use the same deflection 
 distances on both variometers and to have the deflector in the same 
 horizontal plane with the deflected magnet. 
 
 It is evident that the effect of the deflector on the // magnet 
 corresponds to an increase or decrease of the horizontal intensity by 
 an amount equal to the intensity of the field of the deflector at the 
 selected distance. The amount by which the D magnet is deflected 
 depends upon the relative intensity of the earth's field and that of 
 the deflector at the selected distance. 
 
CONVERSION TO ABSOLUTE VALUES. Ill 
 
 Let ^ = the number of millimeters which the D spot is deflected. 
 7= the angle through which the D magnet is deflected. 
 u f = the number of millimeters which the H spot is deflected. 
 h = H scale value, i. e., the change in H, expressed in gammas, 
 
 corresponding to a change in ordinate of 1 mm. 
 W= field intensity of the deflector at the selected distance. 
 In the case of the H deflections : 
 
 e h .u'=W 
 In the case of the D deflections : 
 
 , = flu tan IV / \Bu( 
 
 Since the deflection angle is always small its tangent may be taken 
 as proportional to the angle and we have just seen that the D scale 
 value is 
 
 Hence 
 
 , Hu/ f \ 2u H / f 
 
 As the deflection observations give directly the values of 2u and 2u', 
 it is more convenient to introduce a 2 in both numerator and denomi- 
 nator of the formula and use it in the form given. It has already 
 been pointed out that there is very little variation in the torsion 
 coefficient of a quartz fiber. The distance between the D mirror and 
 the drum is constant so long as there is no readjustment and H may 
 be assumed as constant for a year without introducing a material 
 error in the scale value computation. Hence, for that period the 
 
 H / 
 factor H^> ' yriTT ma J be regarded as constant and the formula be- 
 
 comes simply 
 
 fc = ^(constant 
 
 The form of observation and computation is shown in the following 
 example. It will be noticed that the two results from deflections 
 at different distances do not agree exactly. A comparison of the H 
 ordinates for times when the deflector was not in use with the deflected 
 ordinates shows that the deflections were unsymmetrical, the amount 
 of deflection being greater when the ordinate was decreased than 
 when it was increased. It has been found that under certain condi- 
 tions of adjustment, as in this case, the scale value varies with 
 the position of the magnet and may be represented analytically as 
 a linear function of the ordinate. 
 
112 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 A comparison of the different determinations at Cheltenham in 1909 
 gives the value J5 = .004. The mean of the scalings for the short 
 deflection distance is 13.0 mm. and for the long distance 18.3 mm., 
 and the resulting scale values should differ by about 0.02^, as they 
 do. When adjusting the variometer, the control magnets should be 
 so placed that the deflections are symmetrical or nearly so. 
 
 It sometimes happens during deflections that the regular spot of 
 light is thrown off the magnetogram and a record is made by the 
 reserve spot. In such cases the two spots must be made to record at 
 the same time at the close of the observations, so that the distance 
 between them may be measured. 
 
 Form 373. 
 
 H SCALE VALUE. 
 
 ate, May 26, 1909. Magnetograph No. 5. 
 
 Observer, J. E. Durban 
 
 .J 
 
 
 
 
 I. 
 
 
 II. 
 
 
 
 o 
 
 
 
 
 Distance 26 cm. 
 
 Distance 31 cm. 
 
 
 a 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Remarks. 
 
 I 
 
 a 
 
 J 
 
 No. 
 
 Scaling. 
 
 Diff. 
 
 No. 
 
 Scaling. 
 
 Diff. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 i 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 mm. 
 
 mm. 
 
 
 D 
 
 E 
 
 E 
 
 1 
 
 38.0 
 
 4 
 
 46.1 
 
 
 
 
 
 E 
 
 W 
 
 2 
 
 78.0 
 
 3 
 
 70.0 
 
 23.9 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 W 
 
 8 
 
 77.9 
 
 
 I 
 
 69.8 
 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 E 
 
 7 
 
 38.1 
 
 39.8 
 
 
 46.4 
 
 B. 
 
 
 H 
 
 N 
 N 
 
 N 
 S 
 
 1 
 2 
 
 91.1 
 -66.9 
 
 158.0 
 
 4 
 3 
 
 64.6 
 -28.8 
 
 93.4 
 
 
 
 S 
 S 
 
 S 
 
 N 
 
 8 
 7 
 
 -65.6 
 93.2 
 
 158.8 
 
 5 
 6 
 
 -27.9 
 65.2 
 
 93.1 
 
 
 D 
 
 W 
 
 E 
 
 
 1 
 
 37.9 
 
 4 
 
 46.0 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 39.9 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 .7 
 
 
 
 W 
 
 W 
 
 2 
 
 77.8 
 
 
 3 
 
 69.7 
 
 
 
 
 ' 
 
 E 
 E 
 
 W 
 
 E 
 
 8 
 7 
 
 78.0 
 37.8 
 
 40.2 
 
 6 
 
 69.9 
 
 45.8 
 
 24.1 
 
 * 
 
 D 
 
 2 u 39. 98 
 
 
 2tt 
 
 23.78 
 
 
 H 
 
 2 u' 158. 40 
 
 
 2tt' 
 
 93.25 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Scalings with magnet away. 
 
 Torsion observations. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 L.M.T. 
 
 Scaling. 
 
 Temp. Remarks. 
 
 
 "ch-cle" Scalin S- Diff - 
 
 
 h. m. 
 
 mm. 
 
 , 
 
 
 
 mm. mm. 
 
 D 
 
 11 02 
 
 57.7 
 
 Beginning of first set. 
 
 
 133 57.4 
 
 D 
 
 11 19 
 
 58.1 
 
 End of first set. 
 
 
 163 - 8 56.0 
 
 H 
 
 11 19 
 
 21.0 
 
 24. 6 : Beginning of set. 
 
 
 103 85.3 
 
 H 
 
 11 33 
 
 21.6 
 
 24.7 End of set. 
 
 
 133 57. 1 
 
 D 
 
 11 48 
 
 57.8 
 
 End of second set. 
 
 
 Sum 112.3 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 Mean for 30 28. 1 
 
CONVERSION TO ABSOLUTE VALUES. 
 
 113 
 
 COMPUTATION. 
 .K= 1720.1 mm. H=19880r 
 
 
 I. 
 
 1 
 1 
 
 II. 
 
 Iog2w 
 
 1.6018 
 
 1. 3762 
 
 " H 
 
 4. 2984 
 
 
 / f \ 
 
 0.0068 
 
 
 t( (j^h) 
 
 
 0. 7686 
 
 colog 2R 6. 4634 
 
 
 " 2u' 
 
 7.8002 
 
 8. 0304 
 
 log, 0.1706 
 
 0. 1752 
 
 c I- 481 
 
 1.497 
 
 Mean 1. 49 
 
 The scale value of the vertical intensity variometer is determined 
 in a similar manner, but the deflector is placed differently. When 
 deflecting the D magnet the deflector is placed to the north or south 
 (magnetic) of the D variometer, with its axis directed magnetically 
 east and west. When deflecting the Z magnet it is placed to the 
 north or south, with its axis vertical. The formula for computing 
 the Z scale value is of the same form as that derived for J?, namely: 
 
 f 
 
 _2u 
 z ~2u' 2 
 
 u' in this case being the number of millimeters which the Z spot is 
 deflected. 
 
 Great care must be exercised when placing the deflector in the 
 various positions in order not to jar the variometer, and thus alter 
 the adjustment. The ordinate with deflector away should be read 
 at the beginning and end of the set, to show whether or not a change 
 has taken place during the observations. 
 
 At Cheltenham, where two magnetographs are in operation, the 
 scale value of the Adie Z variometer is determined by the method 
 explained above, but that of the Eschenhagen variometer is obtained 
 by comparing the daily range as given by the two variometers. 
 
 TEMPERATURE COEFFICIENTS. 
 
 When the variation building is well insulated, so that the diurnal 
 variation of temperature inside is limited to a few tenths of a degree 
 Centigrade and the seasonal variation is very gradual, only approxi- 
 mate values of the temperature coefficients of the H and Z vari- 
 ometers are required. They may sometimes be determined from the 
 regular observatory records by selecting periods free from large dis- 
 turbances during which there was both a rise and fall of temperature. 
 A comparison of the mean of the 24 hourly ordinates for the days of 
 7721311 8 
 
114 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 high temperature with the corresponding mean for the days of low 
 temperature shows the effect of change of temperature. The follow- 
 ing example will illustrate the method : 
 
 Date. 
 
 Temper- 
 ature. 
 
 Mean ordinate. 
 
 1907. 
 Jan. 21, 22, 29, 30 
 
 
 
 -6.79 
 
 mm. 
 93.55 
 
 Jan. 23, 24, 25, 26 
 Differences 
 
 -2.96 
 
 95.15 
 
 3.83 
 
 1.60 
 
 
 
 1.60 
 
 '-sTS* 4 - 41 - 1 '* 
 
 being the scale value; that is, an increase of 1 in temperature 
 corresponds to an increase in the ordinate of 1.9f. In using this 
 method great care must be exercised in the selection of the periods in 
 order to eliminate as far as possible changes in ordinate due to other 
 causes than change in temperature, and an adopted value of temper- 
 ature coefficient should depend on a number of such determinations. 
 Where the insulation is so good that the temperature in the variation 
 building does not change sufficiently to use .the above method, the 
 instrument room may be heated and cooled artificially. For success- 
 ful results the changes of temperature should be so gradual that the 
 temperature of the magnet will be correctly represented by the ther- 
 mometer readings and a time should be selected when the changes in 
 H and Z are apt to be small, unless a second magnetograph is in oper- 
 ation and may be used to determine those changes. 
 
 In the case of the H variometer there is no reason to expect a 
 change of temperature coefficient. With the Z variometer, how- 
 ever, the factors making up the temperature coefficint are so hetero- 
 geneous that a radical change of adjustment may produce a change of 
 temperature coefficient. 
 
 TEMPERATURE. 
 
 In order to determine the temperature of the magnets from the 
 record of the thermograph, the thermometers attached to the H and 
 Z variometers are read morning and afternoon at times which corre- 
 spond approximately with the daily extremes of temperature. 
 Under ordinary conditions the variations in temperature may be 
 assumed to be the same for the two variometers. The change in 
 thermometer reading between morning and afternoon compared with 
 the change in ordinate of the thermograph curve will serve to deter- 
 mine the scale value of the thermograph. 
 
PROGRAMME OF WORK. 115 
 
 TIME SCALE. 
 
 The recording apparatus is provided with suitable mechanism for 
 making a short break in the base lines at intervals of an hour. The 
 exact time of occurrence of the first and last time breaks on each 
 magnetogram, as well as of one occurring in the morning, is deter- 
 mined by the click made by the mechanism when the shutters are 
 raised and lowered. The times of stopping and starting the drum are 
 also recorded. 
 
 Time observations are made often enough to insure a knowledge of 
 the chronometer correction on local mean time to the nearest tenth of 
 a minute. 
 
 READING OF ORDINATES. 
 
 It is customary to tabulate the hourly ordinates of D, H, and Z 
 and also the maximum and minimum values for each day and from 
 them to compute the corresponding absolute values. Local mean 
 time is used and the hours are counted from midnight to midnight, 
 to 24. For the determination of the base-line values, ordinates 
 must be measured for the times when absolute observations were 
 made. In the case of the vertical intensity, H as well as Z ordinates 
 must be measured for the time covered by the dip observations, 
 in order that the value of H may be obtained for combining with 7 to 
 compute Z. The number of ordinates to be read for a base-line 
 determination depends upon the irregularity of the curve at that 
 time. At the Coast and Geodetic Survey observatories the ordinates 
 are measured from the bottom of the base line to the bottom of the 
 curve and at right angles to the base line. It is generally found that 
 the perpendicular at the end of the base line does not pass through 
 the end of the curve, and this fact must be allowed for when deter- 
 mining the time scale. For measuring the ordinates a reading board 
 has been found very useful. A picture and description of it will be 
 found in " Results of Observations at the Coast and Geodetic Survey 
 Magnetic Observatory at Cheltenham, Md., 1901-1904." 
 
 PROGRAMME OF WORK. 
 
 While the routine of an observatory is affected somewhat by local 
 conditions, the following programme of work to be done will be modi- 
 fied only in minor details : 
 
 (1) Enter the variation room in the morning in time to record the 
 8 o'clock time break. Read the thermometers, wind the driving 
 clock, see that the lamp is burning brightly and that the spots of 
 light are recording properly. Make psychrometric observations. 
 
 (2) Compare the timepiece used with the standard chronometer 
 and wind both of them. 
 
116 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 (3) Put new sheets of paper on the seismograph, recording the 
 times of stopping and starting the drums. Wind the clocks when 
 necessary. 
 
 (4) Make meteorological observations in the open air. 
 
 (5) Enter the variation room in the afternoon in time to record 
 the time break at 16 hours. Read the thermometers. Remove the 
 magnetogram, prick holes for measuring shrinkage, date and put on 
 a new sheet of paper, wind the clock, trim the lamp wick and adjust 
 the light. The lamp requires filling every other day. Record the 
 times of stopping and starting the drum. 
 
 (6) Record the time break at 17 hours. Read the thermometers. 
 Examine the lamp and spots of light. 
 
 The clock will run for more than 24 hours, but a more uniform rate 
 can usually be secured by winding twice a day. When doing any 
 work in the instrument room requiring light, a ruby lamp should be 
 used or else the front of the recording box should be closed. 
 
 Absolute observations are made at least once a week, always on 
 the same day of the week. A week's observations comprise two or 
 three sets of declination, two sets of horizontal intensity, and two or 
 three sets of dip. About once a week the magnetograms are devel- 
 oped and the seismograms are fixed. 
 
 With a good chronometer time observations four or five times a 
 month will suffice. 
 
 Deflections for the determination of H and Z scale values are made 
 at least once a month. In case of a readjustment the scale value 
 should be determined just before the adjustment and again two or 
 three days afterwards. 
 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 
 
 Magnetograph record. The magnetograph record should contain a 
 detailed account of whatever happens to any one of the component 
 parts of the magnetograph, so that the computer will have collected 
 in one place all the information needed to properly interpret the 
 results. If the H variometer is adjusted by turning the torsion head, 
 the amount and direction of change should be recorded. If the posi- 
 tion of the control magnets is changed, their position with respect to 
 the suspended magnet and each other, both before and after the 
 change, should be recorded. Similar record should be made of any 
 change in the weights or control magnet of the Z variometer. Any 
 change of adjustment which produces a change of base-line value 
 should be noted also on the base-line computation and on the monthly 
 tabulation of hourly values. 
 
 Adjustments. It is important to make a direct determination of 
 the effect of an adjustment, if possible. For that reason it is desir- 
 able to have a magnetogram on the drum at the time, so that a com- 
 
GENEKAL DIRECTIONS. 117 
 
 parison may be made of the relative position of the spots of light 
 before and after the adjustment. Deflections for the determination 
 of scale value should be made just before a readjustment and again 
 two or three days later. When readjusting the H variometer, the 
 effort should be made to place the control magnets in such a position 
 as to give a constant scale value. If the deflections are symmetrical 
 about the undeflected position of the magnet, it is safe to assume 
 that the desired result has been obtained. The amount of deflection 
 on H or Z corresponding to a desired scale value can be readily com- 
 puted from the formula when the amount of deflection of D at the 
 same distance is known. (Compare formula on page 111.) 
 
 Arrangement of spots. The spots of light should be so arranged as 
 to secure as complete and distinct a record as possible. The relative 
 position of curve and base line should be such that increasing ordi- 
 nates correspond to increasing values of the element. Small ordinates 
 are preferable, but a mixture of positive and negative ordinates is 
 apt to give rise to mistakes. It is undesirable to have the curves 
 so near to each other that there will be many crossings. As the usual 
 effect of a magnetic storm is to diminish the horizontal intensity, the 
 H variometer should be so adjusted that the reserve spot will come 
 on at the top of the magnetogram when the regular spot goes off at 
 the bottom. To avoid confusion the D variometer should be adjusted 
 so that the reserve spot will come on at the bottom. 
 
 Amount of light. It should be borne in mind that during a mag- 
 netic disturbance the motion of the magnet is much more rapid than 
 on a quiet day, and consequently a greater volume of light is required 
 to record its motion on the photographic paper. 
 
 Reading of ordinates. All ordinates are to be read and checked at 
 the observatory. When making the second reading special atten- 
 tion should be directed to the elimination of gross errors, as, for 
 example, misreadings of 5 or 10 mm., reading from the wrong base 
 line, or reading base-line ordinates on the wrong day. Base-line ordi- 
 nates should be read at the same time as the hourly values. The 
 maximum and minimum ordinates should be compared with the 
 hourly values on the same day as a check against misreadings. 
 
 Correction for shrinkage will be made when necessary. Declina- 
 tion scalings will be converted at once to minutes (except in scale- 
 value deflections, where they are to be recorded in millimeters) with 
 the aid of a suitable table, giving the limiting ordinates between which 
 a certain correction is required to convert millimeters to minutes. 
 The torsion factor must always be included in computing the D scale 
 value. 
 
 Magnetograph temperatures will be obtained directly from the 
 photographic record of the Z thermograph, if possible, based on the 
 mean of the H and Z thermometer readings (corrected). If the varia- 
 
118 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 tion in temperature is so small that the thermograph trace appears 
 as a straight line between two consecutive thermometer readings, the 
 magnetograph temperatures may be obtained by interpolation between 
 the thermometer readings. 
 
 The daily means will be computed on all the monthly tabulation 
 sheets, but the hourly means are required for declination only. A 
 day from which some hourly values are missing or on which a change 
 of base-line value occurred will be omitted in taking means. Missing 
 hourly values may be supplied by interpolation when they are only 
 few in number and occur in a period comparatively free from disturb- 
 ance. 
 
 Magnetic character of day. The magnetic character of the two 
 halves of each day, a. in. and p. m., will be indicated roughly by the 
 figures 0, 1, 2 on the monthly tabulation for each element, and the 
 character of each Greenwich day as a whole will be tabulated on the 
 same scale, and this tabulation (in duplicate) will be forwarded to 
 the Office as soon as possible after the end of the quarter. At the 
 same time there will be transmitted a table giving the times of occur- 
 rence and duration of the principal magnetic disturbances occurring 
 during the quarter. 
 
 Absolute observations will be made at least once a week. When 
 field instruments are to be compared with the observatory instru- 
 ments for purposes of standardization and two observers are available, 
 it is preferable to make simultaneous observations, exchanging the 
 positions of the instruments in the middle of the series in case the 
 relation of the two stations is not known. Where this plan can. not 
 be carried out, base-line ordinates will be read for the observations 
 with the field instruments, so that allowance may be made for the 
 variation of the earth's magnetism between the observations with the 
 two sets of instruments. 
 
 Transmission of records. The observatory records will be forwarded 
 to the office monthly, as soon as the necessary computations have 
 been completed. To guard against loss of records in transmission, a 
 summary of the results of absolute observations and a copy of the 
 monthly tabulations of variation observations, base-line determina- 
 tions, etc., must be retained at the observatory. Such a summary 
 is needed by the observer in order that he may exercise proper control 
 over the observatory work. 
 
TABLES. 
 
 TABLE I. 
 Correction to observed altitude of the sun for refraction and parallax. 
 
 119 
 
 Apparent 
 altitude. 
 
 Temperature, centigrade. 
 
 Apparent 
 altitude. 
 
 -10 
 
 +10 
 
 +20 
 
 +30 
 
 +40 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 10 33 
 
 10 07 9 43 
 
 9 21 
 
 9 00 
 
 8 40 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 9 01 
 
 8 39 8 19 
 
 8 00 
 
 7 42 
 
 7 25 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 7 51 
 
 7 32 
 
 7 15 6 59 
 
 6 44 
 
 6 30 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 6 55 
 
 6 39 
 
 6 24 
 
 6 10 
 
 5 57 
 
 5 44 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 6 12 
 
 5 58 
 
 5 44 
 
 5 32 
 
 5 20 
 
 5 08 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 5 35 
 
 5 22 
 
 5 10 4 59 
 
 4 48 
 
 4 38 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 5 05 
 
 4 53 
 
 4 42 4 32 
 
 4 22 
 
 4 13 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 4 40 
 
 4 29 
 
 4 19 4 10 
 
 4 01 
 
 3 52 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 4 17 
 
 4 07 
 
 3 58 3 50 
 
 3 42 
 
 3 34 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 3 59 
 
 3 50 
 
 3 41 3 33 
 
 3 25 
 
 3 18 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 3 41 
 
 3 33 
 
 3 25 3 18 
 
 3 11 
 
 3 05 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 3 28 
 
 3 21 
 
 3 13 3 06 
 
 3 00 
 
 2 54 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 3 14 
 
 3 07 
 
 3 00 2 54 
 
 2 48 
 
 2 43 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 3 04 
 
 2 57 
 
 2 50 2 44 
 
 2 38 
 
 2 33 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 2 53 
 
 2 47 
 
 2 40 
 
 2 34 
 
 2 29 
 
 2 24 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 2 43 
 
 2 37 
 
 2 31 2 26 
 
 2 21 
 
 2 16 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 2 34 
 
 2 28 
 
 2 23 2 18 
 
 2 13 
 
 2 09 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 2 25 
 
 2 20 
 
 2 15 2 10 
 
 2 06 
 
 2 02 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 2 18 
 
 2 13 * 
 
 2 08 2 04 
 
 1 59 
 
 1 55 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 2 12 
 
 2 06 
 
 2 02 1 58 
 
 1 54 
 
 1 50 
 
 24 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 25 
 
 2 05 
 
 2 00 
 
 1 56 1 52 
 
 1 48 
 
 1 45 
 
 25 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 26 
 
 2 00 
 
 1 55 
 
 1 51 1 47 
 
 1 43 
 
 1 40 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 1 55 
 
 1 50 
 
 1 46 1 42 
 
 1 38 
 
 1 35 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 1 49 
 
 1 44 
 
 1 41 1 38 
 
 1 34 
 
 1 30 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 1 45 
 
 1 40 
 
 1 37 1 34 
 
 1 30 
 
 1 26 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 1 41 
 
 1 36 
 
 1 33 1 30 
 
 1 27 
 
 1 23 
 
 30 
 
 32 
 
 1 32 
 
 1 28 
 
 1 25 1 22 
 
 1 19 
 
 1 16 
 
 32 
 
 34 
 
 1 25 
 
 1 21 
 
 1 18 1 15 
 
 1 13 
 
 1 10 
 
 34 
 
 36 
 
 1 19 
 
 1 15 
 
 1 13 1 10 
 
 1 08 
 
 1 05 
 
 36 
 
 38 
 
 1 13 
 
 1 09 
 
 1 07 1 05 
 
 1 03 
 
 1 00 
 
 38 
 
 40 
 
 1 07 
 
 1 04 
 
 1 02 
 
 1 00 
 
 58 
 
 056 
 
 40 
 
 42 
 
 1 03 
 
 1 00 
 
 58 
 
 56 
 
 54 
 
 53 
 
 42 
 
 44 
 
 58 
 
 55 
 
 53 
 
 51 
 
 49 
 
 48 
 
 44 
 
 46 
 
 54 
 
 52 
 
 50 
 
 48 
 
 46 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 48 
 
 51 
 
 49 
 
 47 
 
 45 
 
 43 
 
 42 
 
 48 
 
 50 
 
 47 
 
 45 
 
 43 
 
 41 
 
 40 
 
 39 
 
 50 
 
 55 
 
 38 
 
 36 
 
 35 
 
 34 
 
 32 
 
 30 
 
 55 
 
 60 
 
 31 
 
 30 
 
 29 
 
 28 
 
 27 
 
 25 
 
 60 
 
 65 
 
 25 
 
 24- 
 
 23 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 65 
 
 70 
 
 19 j 19 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 70 
 
 75 
 
 14 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 75 
 
 80 
 
 09 
 
 008 
 
 08 
 
 08 
 
 07 
 
 07 
 
 80 
 
 85 
 
 04 04 
 
 04 ! 04 
 
 03 
 
 03 
 
 85 
 
 9fl 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 00 00 
 
 00 
 
 00 
 
 90 
 
120 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE II. 
 Correction in azimuth and altitude of the sun for semidiameter. 
 
 Altitude correction= Semidiameter. 
 Azimuth correction Semidiameter-f- cos ft. 
 
 Date. 
 
 Altitude 
 correc- 
 tion. . 
 
 Azimuth correction. 
 
 ft- 10 
 
 A- 20 
 
 ft- 30 
 
 ft- 40 
 
 ft=50 
 
 ft- 60 
 
 ft- 70 
 
 Jan. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 16 18 16 33 
 
 17 21 
 
 18 49 
 
 21 17 
 
 25 21 
 
 3236 
 
 47 40 
 
 Feb. 1 
 
 16 16 
 
 16 31 
 
 17 19 
 
 1847 
 
 21 14 
 
 25 18 
 
 32 32 
 
 47 34 
 
 Mar. 1 
 
 16 10 
 
 16 25 
 
 17 12 
 
 18 40 21 06 
 
 25 09 
 
 32 20 
 
 47 16 
 
 Apr. 1 
 
 1602 
 
 16 17 
 
 17 04 
 
 18 31 
 
 2056 
 
 24 57 
 
 3204 
 
 4653 
 
 May 1 ! 15 54 16 09 
 
 16 55 
 
 18 22 
 
 20 45 
 
 24 44 
 
 31 48 
 
 46 29 
 
 June 1 
 July 1 
 
 15 48 
 15 46 
 
 16 03 
 16 01 
 
 16 49 
 16 47 
 
 18 15 
 18 12 
 
 20 38 
 2035 
 
 24 35 
 24 32 
 
 31 36 
 31 32 
 
 46 12 
 4606 
 
 Aug. 1 
 
 15 47 
 
 16 02 
 
 16 48 
 
 18 13 
 
 2036 
 
 24 33 
 
 31 34 
 
 4609 
 
 Sept. 1 
 
 15 53 
 
 1608 
 
 1654 
 
 18 20 
 
 2044 
 
 24 43 
 
 31 46 
 
 46 26 
 
 Oct. 1 
 
 16 01 
 
 16 16 
 
 1703 
 
 18 30 
 
 2054 
 
 24 55 
 
 3202 
 
 46 50 
 
 Nov. 1 
 
 1609 
 
 16 24 
 
 17 11 
 
 18 39 
 
 21 05 
 
 25 07 
 
 32 18 
 
 47 13 
 
 Dec. 1 
 
 16 15 
 
 1630 
 
 17 18 
 
 1846 
 
 21 13 
 
 25 17 
 
 3230 
 
 47 31 
 
 TABLE III. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 2 sin* 
 
 t 
 
 0" 
 
 1m 
 
 2m 
 
 > 
 
 4m 
 
 5m 
 
 6m 
 
 7m 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 18 
 
 31 
 
 49 
 
 71 
 
 96 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 9 
 
 20 
 
 34 
 
 52 
 
 75 
 
 101 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 3 
 
 11 
 
 22 
 
 37 
 
 56 
 
 79 
 
 106 
 
 30 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 12 
 
 24 
 
 40 
 
 59 
 
 83 
 
 110 
 
 40 
 
 1 
 
 5 
 
 14 
 
 26 
 
 43 
 
 63 
 
 87 
 
 115 
 
 50 
 
 1 
 
 7 
 
 16 
 
 29 
 
 46 
 
 67 
 
 92 
 
 120 
 
 60 
 
 2 
 
 8 
 
 18 
 
 31 
 
 49 
 
 71 
 
 96 
 
 126 
 
 t 
 
 8" 
 
 9m 
 
 10" 
 
 Urn 
 
 12* 
 
 13m 
 
 14m 
 
 15m 
 
 9. 
 
 
 
 
 
 n 
 
 a 
 
 n 
 
 // 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 126 
 
 159 
 
 196 
 
 238 
 
 283 
 
 332 
 
 385 
 
 442 
 
 10 
 
 131 
 
 165 
 
 203 
 
 245 
 
 291 
 
 340 
 
 394 
 
 452 
 
 20 
 
 136 
 
 171 
 
 210 
 
 252 
 
 299 
 
 349 
 
 403 
 
 461 
 
 30 
 
 142 
 
 177 
 
 216 
 
 260 
 
 307 
 
 358 
 
 413 
 
 472 
 
 40 
 
 147 
 
 183 
 
 223 
 
 267 
 
 315 
 
 367 
 
 422 
 
 482 
 
 50 
 
 153 
 
 190 
 
 230 
 
 275 
 
 323 
 
 376 
 
 432 
 
 492 
 
 60 
 
 159 
 
 196 
 
 238 
 
 289 
 
 332. 
 
 385 
 
 442 
 
 502 
 
TABLES. 
 
 121 
 
 TABLE N IV. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 A = cos 3 cos <f> cosec C. 
 
 s 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 % 
 
 8.23 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.89 
 
 1.83 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.44 
 
 S.23 
 
 22 
 
 2.03 
 
 1.96 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.84 
 
 1. 78 j 1. 72 
 
 1.67 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 2.12 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.97 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.63 
 
 1. 58 1. 53 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.13 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.92 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.68 
 
 1. 63 1. 58 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 2.32 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.99 
 
 1.92 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.68 1.63 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 2.42 
 
 2.33 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.06 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.74 1.69 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 2.54 
 
 2.43 
 
 2.33 
 
 2.24 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.07 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.80 i 1.74 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 2.67 
 
 2.55 
 
 2.44 
 
 2.34 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.87 
 
 1.80 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.68 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.45 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.87 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 2.97 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.69 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.45 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.01 1.93 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 3.14 
 
 2.98 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.69 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.26 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 3.33 
 
 3.15 
 
 2.98 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.26 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.08 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 3.55 
 
 3.34 
 
 3.15 
 
 2.99 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.16 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 3.79 
 
 3.55 
 
 3.34 
 
 3.16 
 
 2.99 
 
 2.84 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.25 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.80 
 
 3.56 
 
 3.35 
 
 3.16 
 
 2.99 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.45 
 
 2.35 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.80 
 
 3.56 
 
 3.35 
 
 3.16 
 
 2.99 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.69 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.45 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 4.76 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.80 
 
 3.56 
 
 3.34 
 
 3.15 
 
 2.98 
 
 2.83 
 
 2.69 
 
 2.56 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 5.19 
 
 4.76 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.80 
 
 3.55 
 
 3.34 
 
 3.15 
 
 2.98 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.68 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 5.71 
 
 5.19 
 
 4.76 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.79 
 
 3.55 
 
 3.33 
 
 3.14 
 
 2.97 
 
 2.81 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 6.35 
 
 5.71 
 
 5.19 
 
 4.75 
 
 4.38 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.78 
 
 3.54 
 
 3.32 
 
 3.13 
 
 2.96 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 7.15 
 
 6.35 
 
 5.71 
 
 5.18 
 
 4.74 
 
 4.37 
 
 4.05 
 
 3.77 
 
 3.53 
 
 3.31 
 
 3.12 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 8.17 
 
 7.14 
 
 6.34 
 
 5.70 
 
 5.17 
 
 4.73 
 
 4.36 
 
 4.04 
 
 3.76 
 
 3.52 
 
 3.30 
 
 2 
 
 S. 1 
 
 9.53 
 
 8.16 
 
 7.13 
 
 6.33 
 
 5.69 
 
 5.16 
 
 4.72 
 
 4.35 
 
 4.04 
 
 3.75 
 
 3.50 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 
 9.51 
 
 8.14 
 
 7.12 
 
 6.31 
 
 5.67 
 
 5.14 
 
 4.70 
 
 4.33 
 
 4.01 
 
 3.73 
 
 
 
 N. 1 
 
 
 
 9.49 
 
 8.12 
 
 7.10 
 
 6.29 
 
 5.65 
 
 5.13 
 
 4.69 
 
 4.31 
 
 3.99 
 
 N.I 
 
 2 
 
 
 
 
 9.47 
 
 8.10 
 
 7.07 
 
 6.27 
 
 5.63 
 
 5.10 
 
 4.66 
 
 4.29 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.44 
 
 8.07 
 
 7.04 
 
 6.24 
 
 5.60 
 
 5.08 
 
 4.64 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.41 
 
 8.04 
 
 7.01 
 
 6.21 
 
 5.57 
 
 5.05 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.36 
 
 8.00 
 
 6.97 
 
 6.18 
 
 5.54 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.31 
 
 7.95 
 
 6.93 
 
 6.14 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.25 
 
 7.90 
 
 6.89 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.19 
 
 7.85 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.13 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 9.36 
 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 8.00 
 
 9.31 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 6.97 
 
 7.95 
 
 9.25 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 6.18 
 
 6.93 
 
 7.90 
 
 9.19 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 5.54 
 
 6.14 
 
 6.89 
 
 7.85 
 
 9.13 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 5.02 
 
 5.51 
 
 6. 10 6. 84 
 
 7.79 
 
 9.06 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 4.58 
 
 4.98 
 
 5.47 
 
 6.05 
 
 6.79 
 
 7.73 
 
 8.98 
 
 
 
 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 4.21 
 
 4.55 
 
 4.95 
 
 5.42 
 
 6.00 
 
 6.73 
 
 7.66 
 
 8.90 
 
 
 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 3.89 
 
 4.18 
 
 4.51 
 
 4.91 
 
 5.38 
 
 5.95 
 
 6.67 
 
 7.59 
 
 8.81 
 
 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 3.62 
 
 3.86 
 
 4.15 
 
 4.48 
 
 4.86 
 
 5.33 
 
 5.90 
 
 6.60 
 
 7.51 
 
 8.72 
 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 3.37 
 
 3.59 
 
 3. 83 4. 11 
 
 4.43 
 
 4.82 
 
 5.28 
 
 5.84 
 
 6.54 
 
 7.43 
 
 8. 63 21 
 
 22 
 
 3.16 
 
 3.35 
 
 3. 56 3. 80 
 
 4.07 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.77 
 
 5.22 
 
 5.78 
 
 6.46 
 
 7.35 22 
 
 N.23 
 
 2.97 
 
 3.13 
 
 3.31 
 
 3.52 
 
 3.76 
 
 4.03 
 
 4.35 
 
 4.72 
 
 5.18 
 
 5.71 
 
 6.39 N.23 
 
122 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE IV Continued. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 A cos d cos < cosec C- 
 
 y 
 
 1\ 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 % 
 
 S.23 
 
 .44 
 
 .41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.15 
 
 .12 
 
 S.23 
 
 22 
 
 .49 
 
 .45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.18 
 
 .15 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 .53 
 
 .49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41^ 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.21 
 
 .18 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 .58 
 
 .53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.24 
 
 .20 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 .63 
 
 .58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 .23 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 .69 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.30 
 
 .26 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 .74 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 .30 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 .80 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 .33 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 1.87 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.41 
 
 .36 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.87 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.48 
 
 1 44 
 
 .40 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.48 
 
 .43 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.53 
 
 .47 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.67 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.57 
 
 .51 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.07 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.92 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.62 
 
 .56 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.99 
 
 1.92 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.66 
 
 .60 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 2.45 
 
 2.34 
 
 2.24 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.71 
 
 .65 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.44 
 
 2.33 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.97 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.83 
 
 1.76 
 
 .70 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 2.68 
 
 2.55 
 
 2.43 
 
 2.33 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.13 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.96 
 
 1.89 
 
 1.82 
 
 .75 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.67 
 
 2.54 
 
 2.42 
 
 2.32 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.12 
 
 2.03 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.88 
 
 .81 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 2.96 
 
 2.80 
 
 2.66 
 
 2.53 
 
 2.41 
 
 2.30 
 
 2.20 
 
 2.11 
 
 2.02 
 
 1.94 
 
 .87 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 3.12 
 
 2.95 
 
 2.79 
 
 2.65 
 
 2.52 
 
 2.40 
 
 2.29 
 
 2.19 
 
 2.10 
 
 2.01 
 
 .93 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 3.30 
 
 3.10 
 
 2.94 
 
 2.78 
 
 2.6* 
 
 2.51 
 
 2.39 
 
 2.28 
 
 2.18 
 
 2.08 
 
 2.00 
 
 2 
 
 S. 1 
 
 3.50 
 
 3.29 
 
 3.09 
 
 2.92 
 
 2.76 
 
 2.62 
 
 2.49 
 
 2.37 
 
 2.26 
 
 2.16 
 
 2.07 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 3.73 
 
 3.49 
 
 3.27 
 
 3.08 
 
 2.90 
 
 2.75 
 
 2.61 
 
 2.48 
 
 2.36 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.14 
 
 
 
 N.I 
 
 3.99 
 
 3.71 
 
 3.47 
 
 3.25 
 
 3.06 
 
 2.89 
 
 2.73 
 
 2.59 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.34 
 
 2.23 
 
 N. 1 
 
 2 
 
 4.29 
 
 3.97 
 
 3.69 
 
 3.45 
 
 3.23 
 
 3.04 
 
 2.87 
 
 2.71 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.44 
 
 2.32 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4.64 
 
 4.27 
 
 3.95 
 
 3.67 
 
 3.43 
 
 3.22 
 
 3.02 
 
 2.84 
 
 2.69 
 
 2.55 
 
 2.42 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5.05 
 
 4.61 
 
 4.24 
 
 3.92 
 
 3.64 
 
 3.40 
 
 3.19 
 
 2.99 
 
 2.82 
 
 2.66 
 
 2.52 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 5.54 
 
 5.02 
 
 4.58 
 
 4.21 
 
 3.89 
 
 3.62 
 
 3.37 
 
 3.16 
 
 2.97 
 
 2.80 
 
 2.64 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 6.14 
 
 5.51 
 
 4.98 
 
 4.55 
 
 4.18 
 
 3.86 
 
 3.59 
 
 3.35 
 
 3.13 
 
 2.94 
 
 2.77 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 6.89 
 
 6.10 
 
 5.47 
 
 4.95 
 
 4.51 
 
 4.15 
 
 3.83 
 
 3.56 
 
 3.31 
 
 3.10 
 
 2.91 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 7.85 
 
 6.84 
 
 6.05 
 
 5.42 
 
 4.91 
 
 4.48 
 
 4.11 
 
 3.80 
 
 3.52 
 
 3.28 
 
 3.07 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 9.13 
 
 7.79 
 
 6.79 
 
 6.00 
 
 5.38 
 
 4.86 
 
 4.43 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.76 
 
 3.49 
 
 3.25 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 
 9.06 
 
 7.73 
 
 6.73 
 
 5.95 
 
 5.33 
 
 4.82 
 
 4.39 
 
 4.03 
 
 3.72 
 
 3.45 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 
 
 8.98 
 
 7.66 
 
 6.67 
 
 5.90 
 
 5.28 
 
 4.77 
 
 4.35 
 
 3.99 
 
 3.68 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 8.90 
 
 7.59 
 
 6.60 
 
 5.84 
 
 5.22 
 
 4.72 
 
 4.30 
 
 3.94 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.81 
 
 7.51 
 
 6.54 
 
 5.78 
 
 5.16 
 
 4.66 
 
 4.25 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.72 
 
 7.43 
 
 6.46 
 
 5.71 
 
 5.10 
 
 4.61 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.63 
 
 7.35 
 
 6.39 
 
 5.64 
 
 5.04 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.53 
 
 7.26 
 
 6.31 
 
 5.57 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.42 
 
 7.17 
 
 6.23 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 8.31 
 
 7.07 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.91 
 
 8.20 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 9.77 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 8.63 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 7.35 
 
 8.53 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 22 
 
 N.23 
 
 6.39 
 
 7.26 
 
 8.42 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 X.23 
 
TABLES. 
 
 123 
 
 TABLE IV Continued. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 A=cosd cos^cosec C 
 
 V 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 y, 
 
 S.23 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 1,00 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.89 
 
 S.23 
 
 22 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.02 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.91 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.92 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.94 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.96 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.98 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.99 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.03 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.05 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 1.47 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.10 
 
 12 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 11 
 
 1.51 
 
 1.47 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.12 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.51 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.55 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.16 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.19 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.21 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 1.75 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.C3 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.24 
 
 6 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 
 
 5 
 
 1.81 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.27 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 1.87 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.55 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.30 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.33 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 2.00 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.36 
 
 2 
 
 S. 1 
 
 2.07 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.75 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.39 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.96 
 
 1.88 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.66 
 
 i.eo 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.43 
 
 
 
 N.I 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.13 
 
 2.03 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.47 
 
 N. 1 
 
 2 
 
 2.32 
 
 2.21 
 
 2.11 
 
 2.01 
 
 1.93 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.69 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.50 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 2.42 
 
 2.30 
 
 2.19 
 
 2.09 
 
 1.99 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.75 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.54 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 2.52 
 
 2.39 
 
 2.27 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.97 
 
 1.88 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.59 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 2.64 
 
 2.50 
 
 2.37 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.04 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.63 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 2.77 
 
 2.61 
 
 2.47 
 
 2.34 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.12 
 
 2.02 
 
 1.92 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.68 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 2.91 
 
 2.74 
 
 2.59 
 
 2.44 
 
 2.32 
 
 2.20 
 
 2.09 
 
 1.99 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.81 
 
 1.73 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 3.07 
 
 2.88 
 
 2.71 
 
 2.56 
 
 2.42 
 
 2.29 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.97 
 
 1.87 
 
 1.79 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 3.25 
 
 3.04 
 
 2.85 
 
 2.68 
 
 2.53 
 
 2.39 
 
 2.26 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.04 
 
 1.94 
 
 1.85 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 3.45 
 
 3.21 
 
 3.00 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.65 
 
 2.49 
 
 2.36 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.11 
 
 2.01 
 
 1.91 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 3.68 
 
 3.41 
 
 3.17 
 
 2.96 
 
 2.78 
 
 2.61 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.32 
 
 2.20 
 
 2.08 
 
 1.98 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 3.94 
 
 3.63 
 
 3.37 
 
 3.13 
 
 2.93 
 
 2.74 
 
 2.58 
 
 2.43 
 
 2.29 
 
 2.17 
 
 2.05 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 4 ?5 
 
 3.90 
 
 3.59 
 
 3.32 
 
 3.09 
 
 2.89 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.54 
 
 2.39 
 
 2.25 
 
 ? 13 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 4.61 
 
 4.19 
 
 3.84 
 
 3.54 
 
 3.28 
 
 3.05 
 
 2.85 
 
 2.66 
 
 2.50 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.22 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 5.04 
 
 4.55 
 
 4.14 
 
 3.79 
 
 3.49 
 
 3.23 
 
 3.00 
 
 2.80 
 
 2.62 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.31 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 5.57 
 
 4.98 
 
 4.49 
 
 4.08 
 
 3.74 
 
 3.44 
 
 3.18 
 
 2.96 
 
 2.76 
 
 2.58 
 
 2.42 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 6.23 
 
 5.49 
 
 4.91 
 
 4.43 
 
 4.02 
 
 3.68 
 
 3.39 
 
 3.13 
 
 2.91 
 
 2.71 
 
 2.54 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 7.07 
 
 6.14 
 
 5.42 
 
 4.84 
 
 4.36 
 
 3.96 
 
 3.62 
 
 3.33 
 
 3.08 
 
 2.86 
 
 2.66 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 8.20 
 
 6.97 
 
 6.05 
 
 5.34 
 
 4.76 
 
 4.29 
 
 3.90 
 
 3.56 
 
 3.28 
 
 3.03 
 
 2.81 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 9.77 
 
 8.08 
 
 6.87 
 
 5.96 
 
 5.25 
 
 4.69 
 
 4.22 
 
 3.83 
 
 3.50 
 
 3.22 
 
 2.97 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 
 9.63 
 
 7.96 
 
 6.76 
 
 5.87 
 
 5.17 
 
 4.61 
 
 4.15 
 
 % 3.77 
 
 3.44 
 
 3.16 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 
 
 9.48 
 
 7.83 
 
 6.65 
 
 5.77 
 
 5.08 
 
 4.53 
 
 4.07 
 
 3.70 
 
 3.38 
 
 22 
 
 N.23 
 
 
 
 
 9.32 
 
 7.71 
 
 6.54 
 
 5.67 
 
 4.99 
 
 4.45 
 
 4.00 
 
 3.63 
 
 N.23 
 
124 
 
 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE IV Continued. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 A=cos d cos# cosec } 
 
 X 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 J7 
 / * 
 
 8.23 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.70 
 
 8.23 
 
 22 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.71 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.72 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.73 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.74 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 1- 
 
 16 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80' 
 
 0.78 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.81 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.02 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.85 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.03 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.91 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.08 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 IX 99 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 2 
 
 S. 1 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.98 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.15 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.00' 
 
 
 
 N.I 
 
 1.47 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.17 
 
 1.13 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 N. 1 
 
 2 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.11 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.06 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 1.59 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.25 
 
 1.20 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.07 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.18 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.10 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.31 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.12 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 1.73 
 
 l!66 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.23 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.14 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.71 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.16 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.47 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.29 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.19 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.73 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.58 
 
 .51 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.32 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.21 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.88 
 
 1.79 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.63 
 
 .55 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.42 
 
 1.35 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.24 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 2.05 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.67 
 
 .60 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.39 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.27 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 2.13 
 
 2.02 
 
 1.91 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.73 
 
 .64 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.36 
 
 1.30 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 2.22 
 
 2.10 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.88 
 
 1.78 
 
 .70 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.33 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 2.31 
 
 2.18 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.95 
 
 1.85 
 
 .75 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.51 
 
 1.43 
 
 1.37 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 2.42 
 
 2.27 
 
 2.14 
 
 2.02 
 
 1.91 
 
 .81 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.63 
 
 1.55 
 
 1.47 
 
 1.40 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 2."54 
 
 2.38 
 
 2.23 
 
 2.10 
 
 1.98 
 
 .88 
 
 1.77 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.60 
 
 1.51 
 
 1.44 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 2.66 
 
 2.49 
 
 2.33 
 
 2.19 
 
 2.06 
 
 .94 
 
 1.84 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.65 
 
 1.56 
 
 1.48 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 2.81 
 
 2.62 
 
 2.44 
 
 2.29 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.02 
 
 1.90 
 
 1.80 
 
 1.70 
 
 1.61 
 
 1.52 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 2.97 
 
 2.76 
 
 2.57 
 
 2.40 
 
 2.24 
 
 2.10 
 
 1.98 
 
 1.86 
 
 1.76 
 
 1.66 
 
 1.57 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 3.16 
 
 2.92 
 
 2.70 
 
 2.52 
 
 2.35 
 
 2.20 
 
 2.06 
 
 1.94 
 
 1.82 
 
 1.72 
 
 1.62 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 3.38 
 
 3.10 
 
 2.86 
 
 2.65 
 
 2.46 
 
 2.30 
 
 2.15 
 
 2.01 
 
 1.89 
 
 1.78 
 
 1.68 
 
 22 
 
 N.23 
 
 3.63 
 
 3.31 
 
 3.04 
 
 2.80 
 
 2.60 
 
 2.41 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.10 
 
 1.97 
 
 1.85 
 
 1.74 
 
 N.23 
 
TABLES. 
 
 125 
 
 TABLE IV Continued. 
 
 Latitude from circum-meridian altitudes of the sun. 
 .4= cos d cos 4> cosec C 
 
 V 
 
 \ 
 
 45 
 
 46 
 
 47 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 50 
 
 55 
 
 60 
 
 65 
 
 70 
 
 */ 
 /* 
 
 .8.23 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.39 
 
 
 8.23 
 
 22 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.39 
 
 
 22 
 
 21 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.40 
 
 
 21 
 
 20 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.40 
 
 
 20 
 
 19 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.40 
 
 0.32 
 
 19 
 
 18 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.40 
 
 0.33 
 
 18 
 
 17 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.41 
 
 0.33 
 
 17 
 
 16 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0^74 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.41 
 
 0.33 
 
 16 
 
 15 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.41 
 
 0.33 
 
 15 
 
 14 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.42 
 
 0.33 
 
 14 
 
 13 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.42 
 
 0.34 
 
 13 
 
 12 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.61 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.42 
 
 0.34 
 
 12 
 
 11 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.52 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.34 
 
 11 
 
 10 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.52 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.34 
 
 10 
 
 9 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.53 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.34 
 
 9 
 
 8 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.53 
 
 0.44 
 
 0.35 
 
 8 
 
 7 
 
 0-89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.44 
 
 0.35 
 
 7 
 
 6 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.44 
 
 0.35 
 
 6 
 
 5 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.45 
 
 0.35 
 
 5 
 
 4 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.45 
 
 0.35 
 
 4 
 
 3 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.36 
 
 3 
 
 2 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.36 
 
 2 
 
 S.I 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.83 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.46 
 
 0.36 
 
 S. 1 
 
 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.87 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.36 
 
 
 
 N. 1 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.37 
 
 N. 1 
 
 2 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.90 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.37 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 1.06 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.37 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.04 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.93 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.37 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.61 
 
 0.48 
 
 0.38 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.61 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.38 
 
 6 
 
 7 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.10 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.77 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.38 
 
 7 
 
 8 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 0.99 
 
 0.95 
 
 0.78 
 
 0.63 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.38 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.01 
 
 0.97 
 
 0.79 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.39 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 1.21 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.12 
 
 1.07 
 
 1.03 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.80 
 
 0.64 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.39 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.14 
 
 1.09 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.65 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.39 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.16 
 
 1.11 
 
 .07 
 
 1.02 
 
 0.82 
 
 0.66 
 
 0.52 
 
 0.39 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.19 
 
 1.14 
 
 .09 
 
 1.04 
 
 0.84 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.52 
 
 0.40 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 1.33 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.22 
 
 1.16 
 
 .11 
 
 1.06 
 
 0.85 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.53 
 
 0.40 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.19 
 
 .13 
 
 1.08 
 
 0.86 
 
 0.68 
 
 0.53 
 
 0.40 
 
 15 
 
 16 
 
 1.40 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.21 
 
 .16 
 
 1.10 
 
 0.88 
 
 0.69 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.41 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 1.44 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.24 
 
 .18 
 
 1.13 
 
 0.89 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.54 
 
 0.41 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 1.48 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.27 
 
 .21 
 
 1.15 
 
 0.91 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.55 
 
 0.41 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 1.52 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.37 
 
 1.31 
 
 .24 
 
 1.18 
 
 0.92 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.42 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 1.57 
 
 1.49 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.21 
 
 0.94 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.42 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 1.62 
 
 1.53 
 
 1.45 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.24 
 
 0.96 
 
 0.74 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.46 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 1.68 
 
 1.58 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.34 
 
 1.27 
 
 0.98 
 
 0.75 
 
 0.57 
 
 0.50 
 
 22 
 
 N.23 
 
 1.74 
 
 1.64 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.46 
 
 1.38 
 
 1.30 
 
 1.00 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.58 
 
 0.54 
 
 N.23 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
126 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE V. 
 
 Correction for rate of chronometer (oscillations). 
 (The correction is to be added when chronometer was losing and subtracted when gaining.) 
 
 Daily 
 rate. 
 
 Time of one oscillation. 
 
 3.0 
 
 4.0 
 
 5.0 
 
 6.0 
 
 7.0 
 
 8.0 
 
 9.0 
 
 s. 
 
 *. 
 
 s. 
 
 *. 
 
 s. 
 
 0. 
 
 *. 
 
 *. 
 
 1.0 
 
 0.00003 
 
 0.00005 
 
 0.00006 
 
 0.00007 
 
 0.00008 
 
 0.00009 
 
 0.00010 
 
 2.0 
 
 07 
 
 09 
 
 12 
 
 14 
 
 16 
 
 19 
 
 21 
 
 3.0 
 
 10 
 
 14 
 
 17 , 21 
 
 24 
 
 28 
 
 31 
 
 4.0 
 
 14 
 
 19 
 
 23 
 
 28 
 
 32 
 
 37 
 
 42 
 
 5.0 
 
 17 
 
 23 
 
 29 
 
 35 
 
 41 
 
 46 
 
 52 
 
 6.0 
 
 21 
 
 28 
 
 35 
 
 42 
 
 49 
 
 56 
 
 63 
 
 7.0 
 
 24 
 
 32 
 
 40 
 
 49 
 
 57 
 
 65 
 
 73 
 
 8.0 
 
 28 
 
 37 
 
 46 
 
 56 
 
 65 
 
 74 
 
 83 
 
 9.0 
 
 31 
 
 42 
 
 52 
 
 62 
 
 73 
 
 83 
 
 94 
 
 10.0 
 
 35 
 
 46 
 
 58 
 
 69 
 
 81 
 
 93 
 
 104 
 
 20.0 
 
 69 
 
 93 
 
 116 
 
 139 
 
 162 
 
 185 
 
 ' 208 
 
 30.0 
 
 0.00104 
 
 0.00139 
 
 0. 00174 
 
 0.00208 
 
 0. 00243 
 
 0. 00278 
 
 0. 00313 
 
 3 m 56'.6 
 
 0.00821 
 
 0. 01095 
 
 0. 01369 
 
 0.01643 
 
 0. 01917 
 
 0. 02190 
 
 0. 02464 
 
 The last line is added for the case in which a sidereal chronometer was used in observing. 
 
 TABLE VI. 
 Torsion factor (oscillations). 
 
 (Values of [log 5400-log (5400-ft)] are given in units of the fifth decimal 
 place; h is expressed in minutes of arc.) 
 
 A 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.1 
 
 0.2 
 
 0.3 
 
 0.4' 
 
 0.5 
 
 0.6 
 
 0.7 
 
 0.8 
 
 ... 
 
 
 
 
 
 1 
 
 2 
 
 2 
 
 3 
 
 4 
 
 5 
 
 6 
 
 *6 
 
 7 
 
 1 
 
 8 
 
 9 
 
 10 
 
 10 
 
 11 
 
 12 
 
 13 
 
 14 
 
 14 
 
 15 
 
 2 
 
 16 
 
 17 
 
 18 
 
 18 
 
 19 
 
 20 
 
 21 
 
 22 
 
 23 
 
 23 
 
 3 
 
 24 
 
 25 
 
 26 
 
 27 
 
 27 
 
 28 
 
 29 
 
 30 
 
 31 
 
 31 
 
 4 
 
 32 
 
 33 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 35 
 
 36 
 
 37 
 
 38 
 
 39 
 
 39 
 
 5 
 
 40 
 
 41 
 
 42 
 
 43 
 
 43 
 
 44 
 
 45 
 
 46 47 
 
 47 
 
 6 
 
 48 
 
 49 
 
 50 
 
 51 
 
 51 
 
 52 
 
 53 
 
 54 
 
 55 
 
 55 
 
 7 
 
 56 
 
 57 
 
 58 
 
 59 
 
 59 
 
 60 
 
 61 
 
 62 
 
 63 
 
 63 
 
 8 
 
 64 
 
 65 
 
 66 
 
 67 
 
 68 
 
 68 
 
 69 
 
 70 
 
 71 
 
 72 
 
 9 
 
 72 
 
 73 
 
 74 
 
 75 
 
 76 
 
 76 
 
 77 
 
 78 
 
 79 
 
 80 
 
TABLES. 
 
 127 
 
 TABLE VII. 
 
 Reduction of log C 'from 20 C. to other temperatures (deflections). 
 (The corrections are given in terms of the fifth decimal place in the logarithm.) 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Corr'n. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Corr'n. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Corr'n. 
 
 Temp. 
 
 Corr'n. 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 +50 
 
 10 
 
 +25 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 -25 
 
 1 
 
 47.5 
 
 11 
 
 22. 5 
 
 21 
 
 - 2.5 
 
 31 
 
 27.5 
 
 2 
 
 45 12 
 
 20 
 
 22 
 
 5 
 
 32 
 
 30. 
 
 3 
 
 42.5 
 
 13 
 
 17.5 
 
 23 
 
 7.5 
 
 33 
 
 32.5 
 
 4 
 
 40 14 
 
 15 
 
 24 
 
 10 
 
 34 
 
 35 
 
 5 
 
 37.5 15 
 
 12.5 
 
 25 
 
 12.5 
 
 35 
 
 37.5 
 
 6 
 
 35 16 
 
 10 
 
 26 
 
 15 
 
 36 
 
 40 
 
 7 
 
 32.5 
 
 17 
 
 7.5 ! 
 
 27 
 
 17.5 
 
 37 
 
 42.5 
 
 8 
 
 30 
 
 18 
 
 5 
 
 28 20 
 
 38 
 
 45 
 
 9 
 
 27.5 
 
 19 
 
 + 2.5 
 
 29 
 
 22.5 
 
 39 
 
 47.5 
 
 10 
 
 +25 
 
 20 
 
 
 
 30 
 
 -25 
 
 40 
 
 -60 
 
 TABLE VIII. 
 Correction for lack of balance of dip needle. 
 
 (dl is the difference of the two values of dip from observations before and after 
 reversal of polarities. The correction is always to be added.) 
 
 7 
 
 10 
 
 20 
 
 30 
 
 40 
 
 45 
 
 50 
 
 55 
 
 60 
 
 65 
 
 70 
 
 75 
 
 dl 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 10 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.01 
 
 0.01 
 
 0.01 
 
 0.01 
 
 0.02 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.03 
 
 20 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.02 0.03 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.04 
 
 0.04 
 
 0.05 
 
 0.06 
 
 0.08 
 
 0.11 
 
 30 
 
 0.00 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.04 
 
 0.05 
 
 0.06 
 
 0.08 
 
 0.09 
 
 0.11 
 
 0.14 
 
 0.18 
 
 0.24 
 
 40 
 
 0.01 
 
 0.05 
 
 0.06 
 
 0.09 
 
 0.11 
 
 0.14 
 
 0.16 
 
 0.20 
 
 0.25 
 
 0.32 
 
 0.43 
 
 50 
 
 0.02 
 
 0.08 
 
 0.10 
 
 0.15 
 
 0.18 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.26 
 
 0.31 
 
 0.40 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.67 
 
 1 00 
 
 0.03 
 
 0.10 
 
 0.15 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.32 
 
 0.38 
 
 0.45 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.72 
 
 0.97 
 
 10 
 
 0.05 
 
 0. 13 0. 20 
 
 0.30 
 
 0.36 
 
 0.43 
 
 0.51 
 
 0.62 
 
 0.76 
 
 0.98 
 
 1.33 
 
 20 
 
 0.07 
 
 0.17 0.26 0.39 
 
 0.47 
 
 0.56 
 
 0.67 
 
 0.81 
 
 0.99 
 
 1.28 
 
 1.74 
 
 30 
 
 0.09 
 
 0.22 
 
 0.33 
 
 0.49 
 
 0.59 
 
 0.70 
 
 0.85 
 
 1.03 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.62 
 
 2.20 
 
 40 
 
 0.12 
 
 0.27 
 
 0.41 
 
 0.60 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.86 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.27 
 
 1.56 
 
 2.00 
 
 2.71 
 
 50 
 
 0.15 
 
 0.33 
 
 0.50 
 
 0.73 
 
 0.88 
 
 1.04 
 
 1.26 
 
 1.54 
 
 1.89 
 
 2.42 
 
 3.28 
 
 2 00 
 
 0.17 
 
 0. 39 0. 60 
 
 0.87 
 
 1.05 
 
 1.24 
 
 1.50 
 
 1.82 
 
 2.25 
 
 2.88 
 
 3.91 
 
128 DIRECTIONS FOE MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE IX. 
 Diurnal variation of declination. 
 
 Month. 
 
 Jan., Feb., Nov., Dec. 
 
 Mar., Apr., Sept., Oct. 
 
 May, June, July, Aug. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 --0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.8 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 2 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.1 
 
 3 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 4 
 
 +0.1 
 
 +0.1 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.1 
 
 +0.9 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 5 
 
 +0.3 
 
 +0.3 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +1.1 
 
 +1.1 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 +2.6 
 
 +1.8 
 
 +0.7 
 
 +0.6 
 
 6 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.6 
 
 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 +2.1 
 
 +1.9 
 
 +0.9 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +4.5 
 
 +3.5 
 
 +1.9 
 
 +1.8 
 
 7 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +1.1 
 
 0.0 
 
 +0.1 
 
 +3.4 
 
 +3.3 
 
 +2.2 
 
 +2.0 
 
 +6.2 
 
 +5.0 
 
 +3.6 
 
 +3.4 
 
 8 
 
 +1.7 
 
 +2.1 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +1.1 
 
 +4.7 
 
 +4.2 
 
 +3.1 
 
 +2.6 
 
 +7.2 
 
 +5.3 
 
 +3.5 
 
 +3.G 
 
 9 
 
 +2.2 
 
 +2.9 
 
 +1.9 
 
 +2.3 
 
 +4.7 
 
 +3.6 
 
 +2.7 
 
 +2.5 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +3.9 
 
 +2.1 
 
 +2.5 
 
 10 
 
 +1.8 
 
 +2.3 
 
 +2.0 
 
 +2.8 
 
 +3.6 
 
 +1.7 
 
 +1.3 
 
 +1.8 
 
 +4.4 
 
 +0.9 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +1.0 
 
 11 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.9 
 
 +2.1 
 
 +1.7 
 
 -1.0 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.8 
 
 -2.2 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -0.4 
 
 12 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -1.6 
 
 -0.5 
 
 +0.5 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -3.2 
 
 -1.7 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -2.0 
 
 -4.3 
 
 -2.5 
 
 -1.3 
 
 13 
 
 -0.7 
 
 -2.8 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.8 
 
 -2.3 
 
 -4.2 
 
 -2.1 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -3.8 
 
 -5.0 
 
 -2.5 
 
 -1.9 
 
 14 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -2.8 
 
 -1.8 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -3.0 
 
 -4.0 
 
 -1.9 
 
 -2.0 
 
 -5.0 
 
 -4.6 
 
 -2.0 
 
 -2.1 
 
 15 
 
 -1.6 
 
 -2.1 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -1.7 
 
 -3.3 
 
 -3.0 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -1.9 
 
 -5.3 
 
 -3.4 
 
 -1.3 
 
 -1.9 
 
 16 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.9 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -3.1 
 
 -1.7 
 
 -0.8 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -4.6 
 
 -2.0 
 
 -0.7 
 
 -1.4 
 
 17 
 
 -1.3 
 
 -0.6 
 
 0.0 
 
 -1.0 
 
 -2.6 
 
 -0.7 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.9 
 
 -3.5 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.7 
 
 18 
 
 -0.8 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -2.0 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -2.2 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.5 
 
 19 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0. 2 +0. 1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -1.1 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.5 
 
 20 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.9 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.8 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.5 
 
 21 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.1 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.8 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.7 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.5 
 
 22 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 0.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.7 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.9 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 23 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.3 0.0 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.7 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.9 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 24 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0. 1 -0. 1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.0 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.9 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 Sitka, Alaska, 1902-1906. Mean declination, 29 56.6 E. 
 Cheltenham, Md., 1902-1906. 5 13.9 W. 
 
 Honolulu, Hawaii, 1902-190K. 9 20.9 E. 
 
 Vieques, Porto Rico, 1904-1906. 1 38. 4 W. 
 
 A plus sign indicates that e.ast declination is greater or west declination is less than the mean for the day. 
 
TABLES. 
 
 TABLE X. 
 Diurnal variation of dip. 
 
 129 
 
 Month. 
 
 Jan., Feb., Nov., Dec. 
 
 Mar., Apr., Sept., Oct. 
 
 May, June, July, Aug. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P. R. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.2 
 
 4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 0.0 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.2 
 
 5 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 6 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -0.1 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.2 
 
 7 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 0.0 
 
 +1.0 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.9 
 
 -0.2 
 
 8 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.1 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.5 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +1.1 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 9 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +0.6 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +1.3 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.6 
 
 10 
 
 +0.1 
 
 +0.6 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.7 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +1.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.8 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +1.3 
 
 -1.0 
 
 -0.7 
 
 11 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +1.0 
 
 1.0 
 
 -0.7 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +1.1 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.9 
 
 +1.0 
 
 +0.8 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.8 
 
 12 
 
 +0.7 
 
 +1.0 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +1.2 
 
 +0.7 
 
 -1.8 
 
 -0.8 
 
 +1.2 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -1.5 
 
 -0.8 
 
 13 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.7 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +1.2 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -1.8 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +1.1 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -1.3 
 
 -0.5 
 
 14 
 
 +0.8 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -1.2 
 
 0.0 
 
 +1.0 
 
 0.0 
 
 -1.4 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0.8 
 
 -0.7 
 
 -0.9 
 
 -0.1 
 
 15 
 
 +0.5 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.7 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.9 
 
 0.0 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.7 
 
 -0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 16 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.1 
 
 -0.6 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 17 
 
 -0.1 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 0.0 
 
 -0.3 
 
 0.0 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.1 
 
 +0.5 
 
 18 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 19 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 20 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 21 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.5 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 22 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.3 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 23 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 24 
 
 -0.2 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.6 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.3 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 -0.4 
 
 -0.2 
 
 +0.4 
 
 +0.2 
 
 Sitka, Alaska, 1905-6. Mean dip, 74 42.1 
 Cheltenham, Md., 1902-6. 70 24.2 
 
 Honolulu, Hawaii, 1905-6. 40 03.9 
 
 Vieques, Porto Rico, 1905-6. 49 19.6 
 
 A plus sign indicates a value greater than the mean for the day. 
 7721311 9 
 
130 DIRECTIONS FOR MAGNETIC MEASUREMENTS. 
 
 TABLE XI. 
 Diurnal variation of horizontal intensity. 
 
 Month. 
 
 Jan., Feb., Nov., Dec. 
 
 Mar., Apr., Sept., Oct. 
 
 May, June, July, Aug. 
 
 Hour. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P.R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P.R. 
 
 Sitka. 
 
 Ch. 
 
 Hon. 
 
 P.R. 
 
 1 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 5 
 
 -3 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 3 
 
 + 7 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 4 
 
 2 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 -2 
 
 + 7 
 
 + o 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 
 
 - 4 
 
 A 
 
 - 2 
 
 
 
 + 7 
 
 + ff 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 o 
 
 4 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 3 
 
 
 
 
 
 + 8 
 
 
 
 + 6 
 
 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 _ 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 + 8 
 
 <fi 
 
 + 2 
 
 4 
 
 - 4 
 
 o 
 - 2 
 
 5 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 3 
 
 +1 
 
 + 8 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 2 
 
 
 
 + 9 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 2 
 
 6 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 1 
 
 +3 
 
 + 7 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 2 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 9 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 
 
 7 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 3 
 
 +7 
 
 + 6 
 
 
 
 - 3 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 7 
 
 - 2 
 
 - 1 
 
 
 
 8 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 5 
 
 +9 
 
 + 2 
 
 - 9 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 1 
 
 -14 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 2 
 
 9 
 
 
 
 - 5 
 
 + 6 
 
 +8 
 
 - 5 
 
 -19 
 
 - 2 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 7 
 
 -24 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 7 
 
 10 
 
 - 4 
 
 -13 
 
 + 8 
 
 +6 
 
 -11 
 
 -24 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 8 
 
 -17 
 
 -26 
 
 + 8 
 
 +12 
 
 11 
 
 - 8 
 
 -21 
 
 +11 
 
 +5 
 
 -17 
 
 -23 
 
 + 8 
 
 +10 
 
 -21 
 
 -19 
 
 + 9 
 
 +14 
 
 12 
 
 -11 
 
 -20 
 
 +10 
 
 +2 
 
 -19 
 
 -16 
 
 +12 
 
 +10 
 
 -22 
 
 - 8 
 
 +10 
 
 +12 
 
 13 
 
 -12 
 
 -14 
 
 + 8 
 
 -2 
 
 -18 
 
 - 8 
 
 +13 
 
 + 8 
 
 -19 
 
 + 4 
 
 +10 
 
 + 8 
 
 14 
 
 - 9 
 
 - 6 
 
 + 5 
 
 ^3 
 
 -13 
 
 
 
 +11 
 
 + 3 
 
 -13 
 
 +12 
 
 + 9 
 
 + 4 
 
 15 
 
 - 5 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 2 
 
 -4 
 
 - 8 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 7 
 
 - 1 
 
 - 5 
 
 +14 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 1 
 
 16 
 
 - 1 
 
 + 6 
 
 
 
 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 + 8 
 
 + 2 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 1 
 
 +13 
 
 + 2 
 
 - 6 
 
 17 
 
 10 
 
 + 3 
 
 + C 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 3 
 
 -4 
 
 + 1 
 
 + 6 
 
 - 2 
 
 - 5 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 8 
 
 - 2 
 
 - 8 
 
 lo 
 
 19 
 
 O 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 5 
 
 -4 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 7 
 
 - 3 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 6 
 
 20 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 5 
 
 - 5 
 
 -3 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 5 
 
 21 
 
 + 4 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 6 
 
 -3 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 5 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 5 
 
 22 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 3 
 
 - 6 
 
 -2 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 4 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 - 4 
 
 23 
 
 + 2 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 -2 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 + 6 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 4 
 
 24 
 
 + 3 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 5 
 
 -1 
 
 + 7 
 
 + 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 2 
 
 + 7 
 
 + 4 
 
 - 4 
 
 - 3 
 
 Sitka, Alaska, 1902-6. Mean horizontal intensity, 15491 
 Cheltenham, Md., 1902-6. 20121 
 
 Honolulu, Hawaii, 1902-6. 29245 
 
 Vieques, Porto Rico, 1903-6. 29278 
 
 A plus sign indicates a value greater than the mean for the day. 
 
TABLES. 
 
 TABLE XII. 
 
 Multiples of the sines of the angles 22. 5, 45, and 67. 5. 
 
 131 
 
 
 22.5 
 
 45 
 
 67.5 
 
 
 22.5 
 
 45 
 
 67.5 
 
 1 
 
 0.38 
 
 0.71 
 
 0.92 
 
 51 
 
 19. 52 
 
 36.06 
 
 47.12 
 
 2 
 
 0.77 
 
 1.41 
 
 1.85 
 
 52 
 
 19.90 
 
 36.77 
 
 48.04 
 
 3 
 
 1.15 
 
 2.12 
 
 2.77 
 
 53 
 
 20.28 
 
 37.48 
 
 48.97 
 
 4 
 
 1.53 
 
 2.83 
 
 3.70 
 
 54 
 
 20.66 
 
 38.18 
 
 49.89 
 
 5 
 
 1.91 
 
 3.54 
 
 4.62 
 
 55 
 
 21. 05 
 
 38.89 
 
 50.81 
 
 6 
 
 2.30 
 
 4.24 
 
 5.54 
 
 56 
 
 21.43 
 
 39:60 
 
 51.74 
 
 7 
 
 2.68 
 
 4.95 
 
 6.47 
 
 57 
 
 21.81 
 
 40.31 
 
 52.66 
 
 8 
 
 3.06 
 
 5.66 
 
 7.39 
 
 58 
 
 22.20 
 
 41.01 
 
 53.59 
 
 9 
 
 3.44 
 
 6.36 
 
 8.31 
 
 59 
 
 22.58 
 
 41.72 
 
 54.51 
 
 10 
 
 3.83 
 
 7.07 
 
 9.24 
 
 60 
 
 22. 96 
 
 42.43 
 
 55.43 
 
 11 
 
 4.21 
 
 7.78 
 
 10.16 
 
 61 
 
 23.34 
 
 43.13 
 
 56.36 
 
 12 
 
 4.59 
 
 8.49 
 
 11.09 
 
 62 
 
 23.73 
 
 43.84 
 
 57.28 
 
 13 
 
 4.97 
 
 9.19 
 
 12.01 
 
 63 
 
 24.11 
 
 44.55 
 
 58.20 
 
 14 
 
 5.36 
 
 9.90 
 
 12.93 
 
 64 
 
 24.49 
 
 45.25 
 
 59.13 
 
 15 
 
 5.74 
 
 10.61 
 
 13.86 
 
 65 
 
 24.87 
 
 45.96 
 
 60.05 
 
 16 
 
 6.12 
 
 11.31 
 
 14.78 
 
 66 
 
 25.26 
 
 46.67 
 
 60.98 
 
 17 
 
 6.51 
 
 12.02 
 
 15.71 
 
 67 
 
 25.64 
 
 47.38 
 
 61.90 
 
 18 
 
 6.89 
 
 12.73 
 
 16.63 
 
 68 
 
 26.02 
 
 48.08 
 
 62.82 
 
 19 
 
 7.27 
 
 13.44 
 
 17.55 
 
 69 
 
 26.41 
 
 48.79 
 
 63.75 
 
 20 
 
 7.65 
 
 14.14 
 
 18.48 
 
 70 
 
 26.79 
 
 49.50 
 
 64.67 
 
 21 
 
 8.04 
 
 14.85 
 
 19.40 
 
 71 
 
 27.17 
 
 50.20 
 
 65.60 
 
 22 
 
 8.42 
 
 15.56 
 
 20.33 
 
 72 
 
 27.55 
 
 50.91 
 
 66.52 
 
 23 
 
 8.80 
 
 16.26 
 
 21.25 
 
 73 
 
 27.94 
 
 51.62 
 
 67.44 
 
 24 
 
 9.18 
 
 16.97 
 
 22.17 
 
 74 
 
 28.32 
 
 52.33 
 
 68.37 
 
 25 
 
 9.57 
 
 17.68 
 
 23.10 
 
 75 
 
 28.70 
 
 53.03 
 
 69.29 
 
 26 
 
 9.95 
 
 18.38 
 
 24.02 
 
 76 
 
 29.08 
 
 53.74 
 
 70.21 
 
 27 
 
 10.33 
 
 19.09 
 
 24.94 
 
 77 
 
 29.47 
 
 54.45 
 
 71.14 
 
 28 
 
 10.72 
 
 19.80 
 
 25.87 
 
 78 
 
 29.85 
 
 55.15 
 
 72.06 
 
 29 
 
 11.10 
 
 20.51 
 
 26.79 
 
 79 
 
 30.23 
 
 55.86 
 
 72.99 
 
 30 
 
 11.48 
 
 21.21 
 
 27.72 
 
 80 
 
 30.61 
 
 56.57 
 
 73.91 
 
 31 
 
 11.86 
 
 21.92 
 
 28.64 
 
 81 
 
 31.00 
 
 57.28 
 
 74.83 
 
 32 
 
 12.25 
 
 22.63 
 
 29.56 
 
 82 
 
 31.38 
 
 57.98 
 
 75.76 
 
 33 
 
 12.63 
 
 23.33 
 
 30.49 
 
 83 
 
 31.76 
 
 58.69 
 
 76.68 
 
 34 
 
 13.01 
 
 24.04 
 
 31.41 
 
 84 
 
 32.15 
 
 59.40 
 
 77.61 
 
 35 
 
 13.39 
 
 24.75 
 
 32.34 
 
 85 
 
 32.53 
 
 60.10 
 
 78.53 
 
 36 
 
 13.78 
 
 25.46 
 
 33.26 
 
 86 
 
 32.91 
 
 60.81 
 
 79.45 
 
 37 
 
 14.16 
 
 26.16 
 
 34.18 
 
 87 
 
 33.29 
 
 61.52 
 
 80.38 
 
 38 
 
 14.54 
 
 26.87 
 
 35.11 
 
 88 
 
 33.68 
 
 62.23 
 
 81.30 
 
 39 
 
 14.92 
 
 27.58 
 
 36.03 
 
 89 
 
 34.06 
 
 62.93 
 
 82.23 
 
 40 
 
 15.31 
 
 28.28 
 
 36.96 
 
 90 
 
 34.44 
 
 63.64 
 
 83.15 
 
 41 
 
 15.69 
 
 28.99 
 
 37.88 
 
 91 
 
 34.82 
 
 64.35 
 
 84.07 
 
 42 
 
 16.07 
 
 29.70 
 
 38.80 
 
 92 
 
 35.21 
 
 65.05 
 
 85.00 
 
 43 
 
 16.46 
 
 30.41 
 
 39.73 
 
 93 
 
 35.59 
 
 65.76 
 
 85.92 
 
 44 
 
 16.84 
 
 31.11 
 
 40.65 
 
 94 
 
 35.97 
 
 66.47 
 
 86.84 
 
 45 
 
 17.22 
 
 31.82 
 
 41.57 
 
 95 
 
 36.35 
 
 67.18 
 
 87.77 
 
 46 
 
 17.60 
 
 32.53 
 
 42.50 
 
 96 
 
 36.74 
 
 67.88 
 
 88.69 
 
 47 
 
 17.99 
 
 33.23 
 
 43.42 , 
 
 97 
 
 37.12 
 
 68.59 
 
 89.62 
 
 48 
 
 18.37 
 
 33.94 
 
 44.35 
 
 98 
 
 37.50 
 
 69.30 
 
 90.54 
 
 49 
 
 18.75 
 
 34.65 
 
 45.27 
 
 99 
 
 37.89 
 
 70.00 
 
 91.46 
 
 50 
 
 19.13 
 
 35.36 
 
 46.19 
 
 100 
 
 38.27 
 
 70.71 
 
 92.39 
 
 Propor- 
 tional parts. 
 
 22.5 
 
 0.1 
 
 .04 
 
 .2 
 
 .08 
 
 .3 
 
 .11 
 
 .4 
 
 .15 
 
 .5 
 
 .19 
 
 00 
 
 .7 
 
 . / ' 
 
 .27 
 
 .8 
 
 .31 
 
 .9 
 
 .34 
 
 45 
 
 0.1 
 
 .07 
 
 .2 
 
 .14 
 
 .3 
 
 .21 
 
 .4 
 
 .28 
 
 .5 
 
 .35 
 
 .6 
 
 .42 
 
 .7 
 
 .49 
 
 .8 
 
 .57 
 
 .9 
 
 .64 
 
 67.5 
 
 0.1 
 .2 
 
 .7 
 
 .18 
 
 .37 
 .46 
 .55 
 .65 
 .74 
 .83 
 
NIVERSJTY OF CALIFC-NL1 LIBRARY 
 BERKELEY 
 
 THIS 
 
 expiration of loan peHod. apphcatlon is made before 
 
 . 
 
 20m-ll,'20 
 
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY